4566 
 L989t 
 
 V. 1 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 g 
 
 3 
 6 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 
 i> 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 ID 
 
 
 3> 
 
 6 
 
 
 F 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 "
 
 iin-j 
 
 ^=nT.^i sVb^i 
 
 =3 
 
 ^ _ ^ _ 
 
 
 ^1 i Ml iiJi 
 
 ^<?A}iVH8if# ^OAHVH 
 
 :lOSANCElfj> 
 Sa3AINrt]WV* 
 
 sa]AiNn-3WV 
 
 
 -^lllBRARYOc. 
 
 ^ILIBRARYQ^ 
 
 %ojnv3jo^ 
 
 ^OFCAIIFO% 
 
 ^<?Aavaani^ 
 
 ^OFCAilF0P>i^ 
 
 aweunivers-//. 
 
 ^(?Aavaan#' 
 
 o 
 
 ^\^EUNIVER5'/A 
 
 <ril30KVSm^ 
 
 ■^/saiAif 
 
 %a]Aii 
 
 SlIBRARYQ/r. 
 
 aOJIlV3JO^ 
 
 iFCAllFO/?^ 
 
 \WEUNIVERS//v 
 
 '^XiiJONVSOl^ 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 %a3AINn3WV^ 
 
 ,\\\EUNIVER% ^lOSANCElfx^ 
 
 ^HIBRARYQ<- 
 
 ^OJIIVDJO'^ 
 
 ^OFCALIFOff^ 
 
 ^^HIBR 
 
 .^OFCAI 
 
 ^Aavaani^^ ^xjijDNvsm^ %a3AiNii-3WV^ ^<?Aavaani^ ^^oxm 
 
 clOSANCElfx> 
 
 (Ja9AINI13W^ 
 
 -^IIIBRARYQ^ 
 
 -^lilBRARYQ^ 
 
 AOSANCElfj> 
 
 ^^Aavaan-^^ 
 
 ^^Aavaan-^- 
 
 ^WEUNIVER% ^lOS-A 
 
 "^^JllONVSOl^ 
 
 ^OFCAllFOff;^ ^OF-CAIIFO/?^ ^\WE UKIVERS/^ 
 
 
 %a3Ai 
 
 %a3Ai 
 
 ^UIBRARYQc. 
 
 ,\WEUNIVERS-/A vvlOSANCElfT> 
 >- 
 
 ^HIBRARYQr^ 
 
 ;jiii i!:^! im IM 
 
 ^UIBR
 
 
 ^<?Aavaan^^ ^<?A«v8ani^ 
 
 ^HIBRARYOc. 
 
 ^•tfOJUVDJO"^ 
 
 ^lllBRARYQc 
 
 %0JnV3JO^ 
 
 ^MEUNIVERS"//, 
 
 , , _ o 
 
 <ril30KVS01^ 
 
 ^lOSANCElfj-^ 
 o 
 
 "^/jaaAiNdiwv 
 
 § 
 
 ^OFCALIFO^, ^OFCAliFO% 
 
 ^(?A«vaan-^^ 
 
 ^OAHvaani'^ 
 
 aweuniver% 
 
 o 
 
 <r?130NVS01=^ %il3AINn-3W^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^WEUKIVER% ^vlOSANCElfj*^ 
 
 •<rii33NVS01^ 
 
 ^lUBRARYQ^ ^UIBRARYQ^^ 
 
 %a3AIN[13WV^ "^(S/OdlTVOJO^ '^.JOJIIVD-JO'^ 
 
 |1 
 
 ec 
 
 03 
 
 ^lOSANCElfx^ 
 
 Or ■* ■ ■ '^ 
 
 O 
 
 aOFCAIIF0% .^.OFCAIIFO/?^ 
 
 £? "S^ 
 
 ^J7i30Nvsoi^ '^Aa3AiN(i3WV^ "^OAavjiaiH^ %Aavaani^ 
 
 V 
 ti 
 
 -^ILlBRARYQc^ 
 
 ^IIIBRARYQ^^ 
 
 ^^mmy\^ 
 
 %^my\^ 
 
 ^WEUKIVER% 
 
 . . ^ o 
 
 <rji33WS01^ 
 
 o 
 
 %J13AINfl-3V^ 
 
 U-l 
 
 .^,OFCAIIFO% 
 
 o 
 
 ■A^OFCMIFO^ 
 
 '^iJAavagii^' 
 
 ^^Aavaani'^ 
 
 ,5WEUNIVER% 
 
 <ril3QNVS01^ 
 
 o 
 
 "^AaSAINrt^WV 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 .\WEUNIVER% ^lOSANCElfj> 
 
 ii.2<C6 i/Qr"i iLinri iLim 
 
 ^^•IIBRARYQ^ 
 
 ^^ILlBRARYOc 
 
 >-
 
 d
 
 A 
 
 GRAMMAR AND LI.XICON, 
 
 ENTITLED 
 
 ^' // ^T'Pl} r^^ ^r^P^ 
 
 ^ i^tg to tit^oljoi tongue. 
 
 IN TWO PARTS. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 A COMPLETE HEBIIEW GRAMMAR, WITH POINTS, ACCORDING TO THE ORIGINAL 
 AM) PKCUIIAR SOUND OF THE LANGUAGE, ILLUSTRATED WITH ACCURATE 
 TABLES, SiC, THE WHOLE OF WHICH IS INTENDED TO FACILITATE THE 
 
 STUDY OF THAT DIVINE AND MOST SACRED OF ALL LANGUAGES. 
 
 TO WHICH IS ADDED (NEVER BEFORE PUBLISHED) A COMPENDIOUS 
 CHALDEAN AND ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 PART ir. 
 
 A HEBREW AND ENGLISH LEXICON, COMPRISING ALL THE ROOTS AS FOUND 
 IN THE BIBLE, ARRANGED IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER, WITH THE MEANING 
 OF EACH ROOT, AND THAT OF ITS SEVERAL BRANCHES, DERIVATIONS, &c. 
 WITH NUMEROUS REMARKS AND OBSERVATIONS BY THE AUTHOR, WUICK 
 WILL BE FOUND OF THE UTMOST IMPORTANCE TO THE LEARNER. 
 
 BY 
 
 '^e&djtx of l^ebrcto 
 
 TO THE VNIVERSITIES OF OXFORD AND CAMBRIDGE, ETON COt-LEOE, 
 
 LIVERPOOL : 
 
 PRINTED BY G. F. HARRIS'S WIDOW AND BHOTHEK§, 
 
 WATER STREIiT; 
 
 Sold by the Author, and bjr those Booktellers whose Names are ia the LUtof Sahnrnbcr*. 
 
 A. M. 5575.
 
 '^^ .; 

 
 
 THE 
 
 FOLLOWING WORK 
 
 ON THE 
 
 HEBREW LANGUAGE 
 
 IS, 
 
 BY PERMISSION, 
 
 HUMBLY DEDICATED 
 
 TO . 
 
 HIS OBLIGED 
 
 AND GRATEFUL SERVANT, 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 
 [IcntewD at Jbtationetd' ?^aU.] 
 
 3025784
 
 TO 
 
 f^i^ l^ogal Jgfgfimsijs HtHBuiit of ^m»tx. 
 
 Sir, 
 
 Dedications in general too often exhibit 
 a redundant enumeraliou of known virtues in the 
 exalted and distinguished personages to whom they 
 are addressed ; and in that case are superfluous^ 
 because universally acknowledged. I shall, there- 
 fore, forbear, Sir, from stating minutely the high 
 qualifications of your Royal Highness, which have 
 induced me to seek your patronage of the Work 
 I notv offer to the studious public. Your Royal 
 Highness having added to your numerous branches 
 of knowledge that of the Hebrew language — your 
 pious endeavours in diffusing the contents of the 
 Holy Bible through all quarters of the globe — ivill 
 give such a weight towards a favourable opinion of 
 my Hebrew Grammar and Lexicon, that the honor 
 of being permitted to dedicate them to you will afford 
 to my Old age surh ample scope for gratitude, that 
 the remembrance of this distinguished favour, so 
 condescendingly conferred upon me by your Royal 
 Highness, will be cherished to the last moment of my 
 life, tf'iih all that devotion and respect witft wfticft 
 I have tfte fionor to subscribe myself 
 
 Sir, 
 
 Your Royal HigJmess's 
 
 Most faitliful, obliged, 
 
 And obedient servant, 
 
 THE AUTHOR.
 
 and > . 
 
 ^Can. PREFACE. 
 
 ft<5 
 
 The author most respectfully apologizes for 
 the delay of his publication entitled D>P?^n "^V^ 
 * The Gate of Heaven;' feeling assured that a 
 generous public, when acquainted with the 
 cause, will continue towards him that support 
 which it will ever be his pride to merit. The 
 loss of sight for upwards of three years by cata- 
 racts has hitherto prevented the fulfilment of 
 his engagements with the public. He begs 
 leave to say that, from the happy effect of 
 couching, he has at last been able to complete 
 his work ; and trusts that the useful and impor- 
 tant knowledge it will be found to contain will 
 sufficiently compensate for its unavoidable 
 delay. 
 
 The title of 0'>wri nvti^ the author has ap- 
 plied to the Lexicon ; the Grammar he has 
 nominated nnsp ' a key :' both will be found 
 consistent with the publication, which is in- 
 tended — first, to teach the elements of the lan- 
 guage on a plan preferable to any yet published ; 
 secondly, to unfold several mysterious and ob- 
 scure parts of scripture, particularly the etymo-
 
 IV 
 
 logy of names, and the several relations of f 
 Deity, and that of each individual o^ i 
 creation, as will appear in the Lexicon, ed 
 
 D:p*fn iva^ * the gate -of heaven,' lh( j for 
 
 acquiring true knowledge, alluded td-^^^h the 
 word ^^^ ' the gate,' Psalm cxviii, verse 20: 
 in ijcln^^ D^pn^^'^qS -\vm nr^' this is the gate of 
 the Lord, in which the lighteous shall enter;' 
 speaking of those who search after true know^ 
 ledge, to comprehend divine mysteries, Sec, 
 which can only be obtained from the Hebrew. 
 
 The most important remarks of ihe author in 
 this publication are chiefly intended to prove — - 
 
 1 . That the Hebrew language was coeval 
 with the creation, and spoken by all until the 
 building of the tower of Babel. 
 
 2. That after the confusion of tongues, the 
 same remained in the family of '^^y. ngiebher^ 
 from whom Abraham was descended," and 
 with whom and his offspring the same continued 
 in a pure state. In this language God revealed 
 his oracles to the patriarchs Abraham, Isaac, 
 and Jacob ; by the family of the latter (the 
 twelve tribes) it was carried down to Egypt, 
 
 * Whence comes the nationfil adjective ^"^^V iis;ihhrery 
 a descendant of inV the translation of which oui?ht <o be 
 ngibhree, not Hebrew,, the H being improperly adJeJ.
 
 where it remained the mother tongue of all 
 Israel during then' captivity — inithe wilderness, 
 and whilst they were in possession of the land 
 erf Canaan, until their dispersion into different 
 parts of the world. From that. time it ceased 
 to he a living language : yet the same was re- 
 tained in its purity by many, viz. the latter 
 prophets Haggai, Zachariah, Malachi, Daniel, 
 Nehemiah, Mordecai, Ezra, and the Elders, by 
 whom it was evidently preserved, being after- 
 wards taught by the men of the great assembly 
 called n^ilf-l nD;ip ^t?>p^e of whom Ezra was 
 the chief, 
 
 3. That the Hebrew now in existence — the 
 characters, the points, accents, kc. are the 
 same, without any alteration whatever, Deuter. 
 c. i. V. 12. 
 
 4. That from the knowledge of the Hebrew 
 alone we comprehend that there is an Eternal 
 Existence, the Creator of all, the foundation of 
 Hue worship, religion, Sec. as will appear — 
 
 First — From the remarks made on the or- 
 gans of speech, shewing that the Linguals and 
 Labials are the chief instruments of utterance. 
 
 Secondly — From the additional Table of the 
 vowel points, according to their original sound, 
 the same hitherto preserved among the German 
 and Polish Jews ; the difference between them
 
 VI 
 
 and the Portuguese jews ; and also the cause of 
 such change, together with the proof of the 
 original. 
 
 Thirdly — From an explanation of the word 
 HN so often met with in the Bible, bearing 
 various meanings, of which no notice has been 
 taken by any former grammarians. 
 
 Fourthly — From the original use of T con- 
 versive, a most essential consideration in Gram- 
 mar, never before published. 
 
 Fifthly— From the remarks on the several 
 Paragogic or additional letters, placed at the end 
 of words, without any reason assigned ; since to 
 this sacred book (the Bible) nothing can be 
 added nor diminished. See Deut. ch. xiii. v. 1 . 
 
 Sixthly — From the reasons of all Hebrew 
 roots being in the third person masculine sin- 
 gular of the preterpluperfect tense. 
 
 Seventhly — From a most interesting remark 
 on the letters ^Ij/oh, applicable to that incom- 
 prehensible Eternity, the Creator of all things ; 
 importing both his name and power, as will 
 appear in the following explanation, illustrated 
 with several scriptural remarks, and thereby 
 shewing how necessary the knowledge of Hebrew 
 is to the attainment of truth in divine informa- 
 tion, which can only be found in the original.
 
 ,THEOLOGICAt OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 .^lil ad J ji>flj CIU3?- Oil II iv/ 
 An explanation.of the seventh of the foregoing 
 remarks, respecting the letters'* and ^ which is 
 principally intended as an ^rguinent against 
 those wfuciy, from grounxiless imagination,, dis- 
 pute the antiquity of the language, the origiii 
 of the shape and form of the Hebrew characters, 
 vjowels, &c> . . Many ineffectual endeavours have 
 been made! to prove the certainty of the 
 former, even from scriptural evidence ; but 
 nefc onie has yet attempted to prove the latter. 
 Both these: arguments still remain dubious iti 
 the opinioa of many. Whatever effect this 
 dissertation may produce must depend on the 
 judgmentof the learued.and impartial reader, 
 whose attention to the following remarks on the 
 letters * and ^ will, it is hoped, terminate the 
 controversy respecting the antiquity of the lan- 
 guage, and the shapejof jfche characters, the 
 vowfel pointSy Jec. > Jn,!! i . ! .! 
 
 ; liUjjthe (observadoiils on the organs, the 
 leaifneriwill find a remark made by the author, 
 that in this sacred language there exists a most 
 powerful analogy, deduced from the Hebrew, 
 vi^^ nnjiH. i2nTv\ CenesisJ chap. xi.. y. X^^'S the 
 * unity of words;* such as is mi equalled in
 
 VIU 
 
 any other language. The same uniformity the 
 author has discovered in the formation of 
 the characters. Vide the table on the letters, 
 where it will be seen that the first part of every 
 letter is the same throughout the whole aU 
 phabet ; from which the author infers the fol- 
 lowing remarks : — 
 
 - .i;j1.^* its motion is that of a dot with a peny 
 thus(.)* and maybe executed by an infant capable 
 of holding a pen or pencil, 
 o /. 2. ('jfromits appearance, has neither begin- 
 ning nor end ; but in itself is both, being cen- 
 tripetaL> ; »:> :.. * ^ 
 
 3. * besides forming a complete letter, is also 
 the first motion of the pen in ten letters, exclu- 
 sively of the five finals,. the same as the ^ is in 
 number, viz. ten. (See rule 42.) 
 
 4.^ is the first letter of that glorious appel- 
 lation of the word ^lyoh^ the only name applied 
 to. the Deity. From the shape, sound, and 
 power, of these two letters we comprehend 
 an Eternal Existence: thus, the? as has been 
 noticed, being the mark of a centre, without 
 beginning or end, is the first emblem of eteraity. 
 The A whose sound is iio^other than the respirih 
 
 ■ — ' • ^- 
 ^7f0:d ... : j:h !:; -;! \yy)'.\\>-d\) //'■;>!-!!. 
 
 f This is the origiivil form of ihe letter yiid, as it is 
 found ill the Riibinical Hebrew : in the text it is something 
 diflFerent, by way of ornament.
 
 IX 
 
 tion of the lungs, is the representation of life, 
 for whatever exists breathes, producing the 
 sound of the letter "^ he, found only in the He- 
 brew. Hence from these two letters we derive 
 a true and only knowledge of the Deity — an 
 Eternal Existence, w-ithout beginning or end. 
 These two letters (V& H) are the characteristics 
 of hiphil^ (see rule 4S) the fifth conjugation, 
 expressing the same action done by means of 
 agency ; alluding to him who is the agent of 
 all causes. — By doubling each of these letters, 
 (* k H) we have both the past and the future : 
 the third person in each tense, thus '^''J} he was ; 
 and ^!.r^,! he will be ; [consequently is at all 
 times] which is comprehended from the four 
 letters ^ yod, ^ he, T vov, n he, forming that 
 incommunicable name Jehovah,* being the com- 
 position of the above two letters (^ &: H) ; and by 
 changing * into "• by rule 18, we find the present, 
 thus, ^)p he is. 
 
 5. ♦is the first motion of the pen in every 
 attribute of the Deity, as ^^ God, ^t^ Omnipo- 
 tent, Almighty, &:c.: IV'^V Most High, kc. 
 
 • The Hebrews are sfrictly forbidden to pronounce 
 this mystetious name ; and whenevel* flie same appears, it 
 is considered as a type and emblem of the Deity, for which 
 the terra ''T\^ adonai (signifying my Lord) is substituted. 
 
 B
 
 6. The form of * is found twentv six times 
 in the alphabet, including the five finals, agree- 
 ably to the numeral power of that incohipre- 
 hensible word Jehovah (set rule A2). Thus have 
 I endeavoured to shew, that from the shape of 
 these two letters the v.hole alphabet is Ibin^ed : 
 (see table I.) each of the letters is emblematic of 
 the Deity. The same will be found in the shape 
 of everv vowel. 
 
 7- That * being the first mark of i>* Is also 
 the last mark of ^ forming 4he word HX al- 
 luded to in Isaiab,' chap, xivl ver. I. '"^P^? ^3 
 
 4D*ii^N ]^K nySnp^ \Tr\^ '^^ilX^^i^'^.'WV.—'' thus 
 
 *' says the Lord of Hosts, 1 am the first, and I 
 *' am the last, and w^ithoutrne there is no God." 
 From the import of the letter * as before staled, 
 this verse is understood. For the remainder of 
 the author's remark on the word ^^ see observa- 
 tion on rule 30. It is also further to be remarked, 
 that the above three motions of the pen, forming 
 the whole of the alphabet, are the only figures 
 by vvhich all the vowels are represented, namely, 
 a point (.), an horizontal line {-),' and a per- 
 pendicular ( > ). (See the table on the vowels.) The 
 author's observations on the same, respecting 
 their situation, ppwer,&:c. will be found of the 
 utmost import, and deserving of the reader's 
 strictest attention. See second observation on the 
 points.
 
 LNTRODUCTION. 
 
 1 HE design of this publication is already 
 noticed ; a few directions however will be ne- 
 cessary to assist the beginner. 
 
 I. To be well acquainted with the Alphabet, 
 endeavouring to repeat it by heart ; to know 
 each character at sight, its power, and the dif- 
 ference in the appearance of the similar letters. 
 
 II. To take a view of the Vowel Points, to 
 know their figures, power, Sec; and, as there 
 are two tables of them given, the learner is 
 recommended to study the second, on whicli 
 this publication is founded. See observation on 
 sound. 
 
 III. After he is well acquainted with the 
 letters and the vowels, to observe the several 
 rules for Reading and forming Syllables ; the 
 power of Shevoa (:) and Dagesh (•). 
 
 IV. Then to proceed to the rules of Etymo- 
 logy, the distinction of Gender, Number, and 
 Cases of Nouns, both the substantive and the 
 adjective. 
 
 V. To get the separable Pronouns by heart, 
 observing the inseparable Pronouns, as used for
 
 xu 
 
 the declension of Nouns, with the exception of 
 a few changes of some Vowels, as will appear 
 in the table. 
 
 VI. To proceed to the Verbs, according to 
 the rules laid down for that purpose : the root 
 given for an example he must endeavour to get 
 by heart throughout the several Conjugations, 
 Moods, and Tenses, Number, Person, and Gen- 
 der, as in the table, observing the characteristic 
 mark to each of them, which he will find to be 
 the same in every other regular or irregular 
 verb, without exception. 
 
 VII. Having made himself perfect in declin- 
 ing a regular verb according to the table, he 
 will take a general view of the irregular, both 
 the quiescent and defective, observing the seve- 
 ral rules peculiar to each of them ; endeavour- 
 ing to get the first word of each mood and tense 
 (described in the table) by heart ; the rest of 
 the persons will then follow in the same manner 
 as in the regular verbs. 
 
 VIII. To copy rule 69, viz. the division 
 of the alphabet into Radicals and Serviles, ob- 
 serving their signification, kc: let the same be 
 before him at the time he is construing the He- 
 brew into English, which will enable him at 
 once to distinguish the root of the sam^word. 
 from the servile letters : the signification of the 
 latter he has before him ; forrthat of the root he
 
 Xlli 
 
 must refer to the Lexicon. His attention to rule 
 i 1 8 will be of infinite use. 
 
 IX. He should endeavour to copy those 
 lessons which are annexed to the Grammar, 
 being designed for the purpose of exercise ; to 
 repeat them several times, observing the rules 
 referred to ifi the Grammai^'aiid Lexicon. He 
 will then be able to open the Bible ; and, by 
 the method before practised> pursue his study 
 with ease; and by copying a few chapters from 
 the Bible, like those in the exercise, putting 
 down every new word he meets with, he will 
 soon attain the end of his desire. 
 
 The divisions of the Grammar into lessons 
 are chiefly designed to facilitate the study of the 
 learner, who should make himself perfect in 
 one before he enters on another, taking no notice 
 of the observations until he has gone through 
 the Grammar, and commenced with the lessons 
 given at the end by way of practice : he Avill 
 then have occasion for the information contained 
 in the notes.
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 ON THE LETTERS. 
 
 Rule I. — The Hebrew Alphabet consists of 
 twenty-two Consonants, five of which have a 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE LETTERS. • 
 
 1 , The following Table will direct the learner how to form 
 each letter by fragments, and will shew the different mo- 
 tions of the pen necessary to each : the letter » is com- 
 pleted by one motion of the pen ; some letters require two, 
 none more than three. To form lliese characters the pen 
 must have a broad nib, instead of being pointed, which, by 
 drawing it^from the left to the right, will produce a line 
 thus (-) or (.) being the first part of every letter : the rest 
 are formed by drawing the pen up or down, except a few 
 which have the line slanting thus (\) or (/). See Table I, 
 
 TABLE L* 
 
 c--5-^ '-^ "O- ^<- '^— '-_=! 
 
 U.§i1-|.§ i § i i =lt-S rS .-sJ.ir 
 
 .. ^ ....».-,...,. . » 1st 
 
 n •» n "5 t> n «> n \ p 7 -^ 'Mir ^ tit -i x 2d 
 
 n-iL'-ipyDj/DJoVD * D rt i i nTjnnSd 
 f* - , - - jst 1 
 Five finals 
 used at the]*' ^ t n -; gd Urder. 
 
 end of words [^ t^ ^ D *] 3d J 
 
 * The learner is most earnestly recommended to copy 
 this table four or five times regularly, according to its first,
 
 15 
 
 double form when used at the end of words, 
 and are called Finals ; six have a double sound, 
 distinguished by a point called dagesh ; for 
 their names, figures, and powers, seepage 16. 
 
 second, and third order, as it will enable him to write 
 well, and to know each character, with the difference of 
 similar letters. One of the author's motives for inv^jitii>g 
 the foregoing table is, to shew the simplicity of the forma- 
 tion of Hebrew characters. Three marks — a point (.)> a 
 horizontal line (-), and a perpendicular (i), are the only 
 shapes required, either in writing or printing; and wherever 
 this sacred language is studied the text will be found the 
 same, except that the perpendicular line in some of the 
 letters is made slanting, or longer, for the sake of distinc- 
 tion. The same uniformity the author has discovered io 
 exist in the formation of the vowel points, viz. that these 
 three marks, a point (.), a horizontal line (-), and a per- 
 pendicular (i), fofm all the vowels. (See observation on 
 sound.) Whence the author infers his second motive for 
 the introduction of the foregoing table, to shew that 
 he who created all things by the power of H^ .yoh, 
 that is, by his own power, (see observation on rule 60) 
 is also the author of this sacred language, whose charac- 
 ters, vowels, &c. are formed from the very shape of 
 these two let<ers, > and n. Those who have acquired a 
 knowledge of Hebrew computation, deduced from the 
 numeral power of the alphabet, (rule 42^ as also that of 
 a theological numeration contained in each of the above 
 three marks, will discover in every letter of the alphabet 
 the number of some of the attributes of the Deity. The 
 same will appenr in the formation and from the situation 
 of the vowel points. See second observation on the vowels.
 
 16 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 Pignre. Name. Power. 
 
 « ,-V Vov, 
 
 a 
 
 r 
 
 13 
 
 D 
 
 V 
 
 Oleph, 
 
 Bieth, 
 
 Gimel, 
 
 Daleth, 
 
 He, 
 
 Zoyin, 
 n Cheth, 
 ^ Teth, 
 * Yud, 
 Coph, 
 Lamed, 
 Mem, 
 Nun, 
 Samech, 
 Gnayin, 
 Pie, 
 V ^' Tsadik, 
 p Kooph, 
 ^ Riesh, 
 «^ I Sheen, 
 e^iSeen, 
 n Tov, 
 
 has no other sound than that of 
 
 B [the vowel joined to it. See 
 
 G hardj as in go. [table oj vowels. 
 
 D 
 
 H aspirate (the act of breathing) 
 
 y 
 z 
 
 Ch guttural (sounding from the 
 
 T [throat and palate). 
 
 Y 
 
 C hard, as m co. 
 
 L 
 
 M 
 
 N 
 
 S 
 
 Ng a nasal, as in ing. 
 
 P 
 
 Ts 
 
 K 
 
 R 
 
 Sh 
 
 S 
 
 T 
 
 These six, viz. D iH ^ ?n t< are often extended 
 to prevent the division of a word at the end of a line.
 
 J7 
 
 THE DIVISION OF THE ALPHABET 
 
 INTO 
 
 FourGutterals, Vnnt^r ^ p^^np/^ Vrhroai, 
 Four Palatines, p^^J j l^ I ^mp j ^ I Roof, 
 Five Dentals, ti^^O^^ || V n\im2^ i Weeth, 
 Five Linguals, n:iSt2-^ J 1 " I pti^^npl ^ I Tongue, 
 Four Labials, ^'tiinL"' J D\nDJ5fnpL jLips. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE ORGANS. 
 
 Spr'ech is the production of the above five organs, which 
 nature lias adapted to the utterance of their respective 
 letters, as marked opposite to each : three of them, viz, 
 the gutterals, palatines, and labials, are also instruments 
 of sound. The remarks the author has made on the above 
 division are upon the Unguals and labials, which, besides 
 their own use in the production of those to which they 
 give utterance, are necessary to assist the rest — soujid 
 speech could not be well effected without the continual use 
 of bolh : these two are therefore considered as being the 
 chief means of articulation ; in conformity to which wc 
 find that both the tongue and speech are of the same ety- 
 mology in almost every language ; the word pti'7 in the 
 Hebrew, Chaldee, Arabic, Syriac, and in most of the Ori- 
 ental languages signifies both the tongue and speech : the 
 same we find in most other languages, as langu, lingua, lan- 
 guage, tongue, &c. the Hebrew language excepted ; which 
 when spoken of throughout the whole bible is expressed 
 by the word H^ti^ a lip, being the principal instrument of 
 that language, from whence it takes its name ; thus we 
 find. Gen. ck. ii. v. 1. DnniT DDK nSJ!^ pt^H Sd ♦Hn 
 
 • T :l - - T T • V T T T • ;!- 
 
 Dnnjj^ " And behold the whole earth was one language and 
 one speech :" the Hebrew one lip and words of unitSy the
 
 18 
 
 Letters of the same organ, also the lour 
 quiescent letters ^^''^^? often change one for the 
 other (see rule 18) \ they are called quiescent, 
 that is, rest — without a vowel they do not sound. 
 See observaUon on the letters ''*^^^ 
 
 word n£3^ alluding to the Hebrew, the only language then 
 spoken, and no other, as will appear from the following 
 remarks of the author on the same verse, viz. DHK T\^^ 
 Dnn>? Dn^*n From the literal sense of these words we 
 
 • T -: • T ;l 
 
 are informed, tha! both the language they spoke, and the 
 foundation on which it is established, meaning the elements 
 of grammar, are clearly demonstrated : thus, ^l^^^ HDfi!^ 
 one lip, alluding to the Hebrew language, whose S' und and 
 pronunciation is as it were one and the same. Respecting 
 the rules of orthography, the pillar of all languages, whose 
 exuberant rules are so frequently violated, or rather so totally 
 disregarded, that little or no assistance can be derived to 
 pronunciation from either books or masters — in the Hebrew 
 they are found the most simple and attainable, if those 
 few rules which it contains are attended to : in any part of 
 the globe, by whatever nations it may be attempted, the 
 same will be found as it was at first, viz. VVH^ nDC!^ one lip, 
 that is, one mode of sound and pronunciation. 
 
 The second part of the verse D^^^? DniTI words of 
 units, or rather the unity of words, alluding to etymology ; 
 namely, from the tendency and implication of these words 
 we comprehend a language founded on its own basis, viz. 
 the Hebrew, the mother of all languages, the only one 
 spoken at that time, and which consequently could have 
 no derivation from any other : all words are therefore ori- 
 ginally derived from one and the same root, as will appear 
 in the Lexicon, which is arranged in a manner peculiar to 
 the Hebrew, imputed to its iirst cause, namely, Dn^TI
 
 19 
 
 These six without a point are aspirate : — 
 
 :i Bhieth or Vieth Bh or V. 
 
 :» Ghimel Gh. 
 
 T Dhaleth Dh. 
 
 ^ Choph Ch. 
 
 5 Phie Ph. 
 
 n Thov Th. 
 
 DnnK the unity of words ; as it was general before the 
 confusion of tongues, so it will be at the end — see Zepha- 
 niah, chap. iii. v. 9. nn^n HQE^ U'm ^K "]3nj^ t^ *D 
 
 inK DDfiS^ mvSl mn» am dSd ^^ph " For then will 
 I turn unto all nations* a pure lip," that is, the same lan- 
 guage in its original pure sound, (as it was at first) " that 
 they may call on the name of the Lord, to serve him with 
 one consent. "t The word "^9111;? I will turn, from root 
 *^|)n he turned, is generally used in reference (o something 
 before existing : the same language which God infused 
 
 • The word D^^Jf a noun plaral, from tbe singnlar Q^f ^ people or 
 nation, is generally used collectively, including many nations; thus we find in 
 the same chapter, v. 17, J D^DVH ]fp DDnJjC ^DVSpl " And I will 
 gather you out of all nations," «&c. whence it is confirmed, that the above 
 prophecy is in allusion to all nations, whose form of worship will be one and 
 the same ; see tbe conclusion of the above. 
 
 t The word eonsejit, in the Hebrew Q^Ji^ a shoulder, is used here 
 metaphorically, the shoulder being a place appropriated to bear a burthen or 
 any servitude, even that of the mind; thus we find in Genesis, ch. xlix. v. 15, 
 
 J /ISP^ ^^^^ tO^I " And he" (speaking of the tribe of Isachai) " shall 
 incline his shoulder to bear [the buithen of the law]" : the word Q^tJ^ is 
 here used figmatively, denoting one and the same; that is, they shall s-erve 
 God in one form of worship, as is comprehended from the original— the foun- 
 dation of all religion.
 
 
 LETTERS SIMILAR TO EACH OTHER. 
 
 
 sh 
 
 gn 
 
 mtchzvhdg 
 
 b 
 
 ^ 
 
 3^ 
 
 D D n T 1 n 1 J 
 
 1 
 
 '^ 
 
 if 
 
 D rj n \ "> n ^ :i 
 
 D 
 
 s 
 
 ts 
 
 s m th n y ch r n 
 
 c 
 
 into our first parents, spoken by all till the confusion of 
 tongues, (as has been stated in the preface) the same will 
 be returned again. Had the prophet alluded to a new lan- 
 guage^the verb]r}l;^ I will gire, from the root IPJ he gave, 
 would have been used instead of "^^HK I will turn ; thus 
 we find in Ezekiel, chap. xi. v. 19, '^^^^ '^ DH^ ^riilil 
 : D?^n")ip3 \m n^nn mi " And I willgive them oVe 
 heart and a new spirit; such as they never before possessed 
 I will bestow on them." 
 
 Another remark by the author ox\. the same prophecy of 
 Zephaniah, chap. iii. v. 8. as being Jlie only verse in the 
 bible containing the whole of the Hebrew alphabet, the 
 finals, vowel points, &c. The subject of this verse is a 
 declaration of God's wrath and indignation towards the 
 latter days for the iniquity of the nations in violating the 
 laws of God delivered to them in a pure language, the 
 composition of this verse; God in the following verse pro- 
 mises to return the same towards the latter end, "For then 
 will 1 return," &c. This will be eflfected by means, and 
 •with the assistance of the Almighty, as it is said Joel, 
 chap. ii. V. 28. \ ^^2 Ss Sv ^m") ^D^fJ Ninn DV3 T^m 
 *' And it shall come to pass, on that day I will send forth 
 my spirit upon all flesh, (i. e. all rational beings) to whom 
 my name shall be manifested and known to all," frorh the 
 knowledge of the Hebrew; see Zachariah, ch. xiv. v. \b. 
 
 : TV-; V ; • - - » V T T T - • .• IV ; -.• t t ; 
 
 "THK " And the Lord shall be king over all the earth j on 
 that day Jehovah will be one, and his name qwq,''^
 
 21 
 
 FIRST OBSERVATIONS ON THE VOWEL POINTS. 
 
 A consonant without a vowel is, like a body withoat 
 life, immovable and unutterable ; whence it is evident, 
 that no language can be uttered without vowels. The 
 Hebrew alphabet, consisting of consonants only, would 
 have been inexpressible and totally ineffable, the Points 
 being originally joined to the letters to institute the number 
 of sounds necessary to articulation, and are therefore 
 coeval with the language. God who endowed men with 
 the power of speech, by means of the organs, directed 
 nature at the same time to produce such a variety of sounds 
 as was necessary for the modulation of speech, thus : — 
 
 
 
 Short. 
 
 
 Long. 
 
 The Gutteral I 
 
 <U 
 
 1 ■ 
 
 or 
 
 au 
 
 The Palate.. J 
 
 -si 
 
 '{• 
 
 , „ 
 
 ai 
 ee 
 
 The Labials j 
 
 
 f« 
 
 ■- 
 
 oa 
 
 \ 
 
 >^ > 
 
 lu 
 
 
 oo. 
 
 These are the original sounds ; each (according to the 
 idiom of the Hebrew) is capable of being rendered long 
 and short, both of the same sound, as will appear in the 
 following tables. 
 
 The additional table of the Vowel Points, according to 
 the mode of reading among the Polish and German Jews, 
 with the several remarks thereon, is intended — first, to 
 shew that the different mode of reading between these two 
 sects is only in the sound of some of the vowels, to which 
 slight inacQuracy all languages are subject— differeut people
 
 22 
 
 use different dialects : second, to shewllie cause of such 
 change : third and last, the proof of which of the two is 
 original, since there can be but one primitive sound. 
 
 It has been observed, by way of defence respecting the 
 different f )rms of worship practised in every religion, 
 that a similar distinction prevails among the Israelites, 
 i. e. between the Portuguese and German Jews : the 
 author therefore endeavours to prove the dissimilarity of 
 comparison, by shewing that the difference between the 
 two sects consists only in the mode of pronunciation of the 
 same word, owing to the loss of some of the primitive 
 sounds, particularly of the diphthongs ; ozo and ie being 
 peculiar to the Hebrew, no accurate example could be 
 produced from any other language, and they are therefore 
 left out in the first table, which is composed for that pur- 
 pose, as will appear hereafter, where the reader will 
 observe that these two sounds are still in existence, and 
 it is the author's intention to restore the language to 
 its primitive state, as it was spoken by all during the 
 time they were in possession of the land of Canaan until 
 their dispersion among different nations, whose language 
 they soon learned, and by that means neglected their own. 
 Such was the state of the Portuguese and Spanish Jews, 
 who, being but few in number, became more mixed with 
 those among whom they lived, and from whom they 
 adopted new sounds. This was not the case with the Ger- 
 man and Polish Jews, who at the time of their dispersion 
 were in greater n'lmbers, by which means they kept them- 
 selves more distinct and separate from those among whom 
 they dwelt : the small portion of commerce they enjoyed 
 afforded them mo'-e opportunity to study the law in its 
 original state, and thereby they remained in full possession 
 of the primitive sound, as stated in the second table. 
 This, I trust, will prove sufficient to vindicate the first and 
 second position, namely, the change of sound and its cause.
 
 23 
 
 That the change of sound does not alter the sense must 
 "be ascertained by those who know the language ; they will 
 then find that there is but one Hebrew bible, c«Hitaining 
 the same laws, statutes, and commandments, which are 
 observed by all Israel. 
 
 The third position, namely, the proof of the second 
 table, will appear from the following observations, viz. 
 
 First — From the two diphthongs ow and ie, whose 
 sounds are equally the production of nature by means of 
 the organs, and ought not to be omitted, but used like the 
 rest of tlje sounds. 
 
 Secondly — The reader's attention is more particularly 
 requested to this remark, it being without exception the 
 most powerful argument that can be deduced, viz. 
 
 ]st — From the two vowels (-) and (•.• ) : these two vowels 
 (as will appear from the observation on the second tabic) 
 are original, capable of being rendered both long and short, 
 the same as (t), (.), and (1): the several rules for dis- 
 tinguishing the long vowel from the short the learner 
 will lind applicable to (-) and (.) with regard to the 
 letters ^IHK, which will be found equally attracted from 
 (-) and (.) as Jl^ mah, and HO raaih, &c. 
 
 2dly — By rule of quiescent (:) and dagesh, which fol- 
 low the short vowel. 
 
 3dly — From the accent, which by rule is joined to the 
 long vowel only : these three signs are peculiar for the 
 distinction of the long vowels from the short ones, in- 
 cluding (-) and (•-• ) and prove their being equal in quality 
 with the rest, according to their arrangement in the second 
 table, by which the mode of reading is regulated. 
 
 How these two vowels (-) and (.) came to be reduced 
 from their original power and dignity,* according to the 
 
 * The word diffnity used here is ronsistent with the denominations by 
 which the ancient grammarians dtstiuguished the vowels relative to their sound
 
 24 
 
 order of the first table, appears evident from the very cause 
 before stated, viz. that the Portuguese and Spanish Jews, 
 soon after their dispersion lost the primitive sound of 
 ow and ie; and in order to produce the same number of 
 vovvols comprised in their namrs, they were under the 
 necessity to lessen the power of these two (-) and (•••) by 
 placing them among the number of the short vowels, and 
 thereby obtaining ten distinct sounds, thus: haw'thats^ 
 isa^'reT/, chec-rick, chott'lom, and sh o-ruck, accordii>g to 
 the arrangement of the first table, namely, ten sounds, 
 produced from the five names, each composed of two 
 syllables, the first long, the second short ; an observation 
 ■which will be found to correspond with both tables, (never 
 before noticed by any grammarian) whence it will appear 
 that the order of the first table is not original, and that it 
 was only adapted for the purpose above stated. 
 
 SECOND OBSERVATION ON THE VOWEL POINTS. 
 
 In the first table of t1<e alphabet the reader will find the 
 author's remarks on the formation of each of the cha- 
 racters and the vowel points, as being the composition of 
 that glorious appellation of the deity, the word H^ j/oh ; 
 whence the author asserts his argument, that both the 
 letters and the vowel points are coeval with the creation — 
 that by the power of XV yoh^ every thing came into 
 existence (rule 60J — and from the shape of these letters 
 
 and power ; with regard to sonnd, they used the words fTI^Ji^ fathers, and 
 
 ^^"77"^]^ begotten, from the similarity of sonnd between the long and short 
 
 :i 
 vowels, in romparison of the resemblance of a child to its parent ; with regard 
 
 to the latter, they used the terms 0*3*7)2 lyings* and D'n*)ti^/!3 ministers, 
 
 • T : • :iT : 
 
 from the absolute power each of the long vowels possesses, ("see rule 17) 
 
 similar to that of a king in opposition to a minister.
 
 25 
 
 this divine language was formed, wherein eternity is dis- 
 played in the composition of every word. That of the 
 letters has already been noticed from the table ; and that 
 of the vowels will be found equally consistent, from their 
 shape, situation, &c ; thus, a point, (.) the form of yud, 
 is placed above the letter in chowlowm (1), in the middle 
 of shooruk ()), and below the letter in cheerick (1) ; al- 
 luding to a phraseology found in the Hebrew, viz. D TlV 
 ^V*7>''^ ngowlom hongelyown, the upper region ; D/Ij/ 
 ^KVDJ^n ngowlom hocmtsoee, the middle region ; and 
 ]1nnnn D /Ij^ ngowlom hattachtpwn, the lower region. 
 Shewing that he who is called ]V7^ ngelyown, most high 
 God, is comprehended by that point. The shape of (.) 
 yud, the first emblem of eternity, is every where. Psalms, 
 xxxiii. v. 13, 14, &c. This point is found in every other 
 vowel except koamots (^) and pawthach (-), these two 
 being the composition of H he, the emblem of life. This 
 might be further illustrated : first, from the increase of 
 that point in some of the vowels ; secondly, from the 
 attraction of the letters *^^^{ after the long vowels ; but to 
 say more would too much enlarge this publication, being 
 only intended as a grammar. However, the author trusts 
 that the remarks already noticed will be sufficient to prove 
 the veracity of his positions, respecting the knowledge of 
 eternity and the antiquity of the language.
 
 26 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 FIRST TABLE OF THE VOWEL POINTS, 
 
 According to the Pronunciation of the Spanish and Portuguese Jews, 
 whose number of distinct sounds are divided into— 
 
 Five long. 
 
 Five short. 
 
 Figure. Name. Power. Figure. Name. Power. 
 
 JiJJ^ kau-mats. .. . an, as in at. ^ pa-tbacli a,* as in at. 
 
 'K »•*»•>-■«•« ay, ••.. gay. ^ se-gol e,« 
 
 If^ chee-rick • • ee, • • • • thee. ^ chi-rik i,» 
 
 "jj^ choa-loni •• oa, •••- loan. ^ ko-mots o, 
 
 T 
 
 If^ .shoo-ruk • . 00, • • • • boot. {< ki-bnts u. 
 
 To these are added one very short, called ^ shevoa e, 
 
 '^ chatupb pathach, a, 
 
 And Ilirce compound vowels < " """'I''' *«°' " ' ' 
 
 f ^ chatuph koniots, o, 
 
 fed. 
 
 sin. 
 
 don. 
 
 bull. 
 
 below. 
 
 among. 
 
 edition. 
 
 other. 
 
 According to the above table the Hebrew is in general 
 taught by all grammarians, for reasons stated in the obser- 
 vations, and is still practised all over the Fast. The 
 deficiency of the two sounds aw and ie induced them to 
 make such arrangements in the foregoing names of the 
 points as would answer their purpose, in order to produce 
 the number of sounds required, viz. five long and five 
 short. Thi-i mode of reading was the c;uise of many ad- 
 di ioml ruU's respecting the change of vowels, in order to 
 correspond with the first table, particularly on account of 
 (-) and (•••) which are here described short vowels only; 
 and, as will appear in the second table, from the sound of 
 their respective names, they are capable of being long 
 and short, the same as the rest of the long vowels. 
 
 • These three vowels 
 
 ID tlie Hebrew sound thus 
 
 > The same id the second table. 
 : aw ay ee y
 
 27 
 
 SECOND TABLE OF THE VOWEL POINTS. 
 
 Rule 2. — According to the original sound of 
 the language hiihefto preserved by the German 
 and Polish Jews, the number of distinct sounds, 
 as will appear from this table, are seven, two 
 of which are always long, the other five are 
 capable of being both long and short. 
 
 Seven long. 
 
 Five short 
 
 
 Figure. Name, Power. 
 
 Hgnre. Name. 
 
 Power. 
 
 •^ '*\^ chow-lowm-' ow, as in now. 
 * — ^i^ tsie-rie ie, • • • • die. 
 
 (There are but few words in the English language simil 
 f ^ to theie two Hebrew sounds. 
 
 Ji^7{i^{i^ koa-mo(8* • • • oa, oar. 
 
 r i^ short komots • • o, 
 
 T 
 
 as in on. 
 
 T 
 
 f^- j^{^ paw-tbach • • aw, • • • • awe. 
 
 - K ' • • • pathach. . a, 
 
 at. 
 
 Hv TMi sai-gel ay, ••-. day. 
 
 r {^ .... segel .... e, 
 
 . . • • end. 
 
 »T ♦{^ chee-rick---- ee, •••- eel. 
 
 ~ ^ chirik • • i, 
 
 • • • . ill. 
 
 ••1 'jj^ shoo-ruk oo, book. 
 
 r ^ • • . . shurik • • u. 
 
 . • • . bull. 
 
 To these are added one very short, called 
 
 7 Jif shevoa e, 
 
 .... below. 
 
 C 
 
 r. }i} chatupb pathach, a, 
 
 . . • • among. 
 
 And three compound vowels J 
 
 ^. ^ chatuphsrgel" e, 
 
 • ••. edition. 
 
 I 
 
 - ^ chatuph komots, o. 
 
 . • . . other. 
 
 THIRD OBSERVATION ON THE VOWELS. 
 
 The establishment of the foregoing table has already 
 been confirmed by the fixed rules of grammar ; the 
 several references of quotations, as stated in the observa- 
 
 • Chowlowm and tsierie are often fouud without the attraction of (^) and 
 ()): this defect does not alter the sound, which is always loig. 
 •• This vowel is often expressed by the word V^^p also D'lQJ^/O alluding 
 
 to the mode in which the lips are formed to produce the souuds oa and oo. The
 
 28 
 
 OF SHEVOA. 
 
 Rule 3. — Two points perpendicular, thus (:) 
 under a letter are called Shevoa ; which, the* 
 among the rest of the vowels marked in the 
 
 tions on sounds. The author, in order to support more 
 firmly his assertion on the above, endeavours to lay down 
 one more proof, deduced from scripture ; this, lie trusts, 
 will evince at once the truth of the same, viz. 
 
 First — From the number of distinct names applied to 
 denominate the vowel sound of the Hebrew language, as 
 expressed in both tables, which are seven,* alluded to in 
 Proverbs, chapter ix. verse I, viz. TWHt^ JiniDV H^VH 
 " Shet has hewn out of her seven pillars of wisdom the 
 foundation of knowledge ;'* derived from the study of the 
 law of God in its original : see Deuteronomy, chap. iv. 
 V. 6, 7, &c. The seven pillars on which the Hebrew 
 language is founded are the seven names of the vowels, 
 expressive of distinct sound, equal in power, and are 
 therefore nominated D07p kings : the first two, viz. 
 (-) and (t:) which from their sound comprised in each 
 name, are always long ; the rest, from the same observa- 
 tioHj namely, each having one long and one short syllable, 
 
 aaroe is observed from every other name applied to the vowels, each expressing 
 the different motion of the lips in the production of soimd ; as, T*J3p koamots, 
 signifyinfif he gathercth, (a handful) whicli requires the gathering of the five 
 fingers, forming a round O. The same motion of the lips is required to pro* 
 diice the sound oa; the word nHS signifies he opened : to souiid uk he must 
 open the lips. The same is comprehended from the rest of the vowels. 
 
 • Shevoa and the three compound vowels are not included. See ruk 3. 
 . t (She) speaking of wisdom in the preceding verse, the word nDDH * "**"•* 
 femiDine.singnlar, to agree with the verb H^VH '""''^ 105. 
 
 T ;t T
 
 29 
 
 table, in itself has no distinct sound, even as 
 much as a short vowel : its only use is to 
 shew that the letter over it must be joined to a 
 another letter, either before or after, to form a 
 monosyllable ; if before the letter, it is called 
 pronounced shevoa ; the letter to v»hich it is 
 joined sounds rapidly, like e in below, as *^3 
 benee, ^'P^ shemang : the shevoa begins the 
 syllable, and the following vowel ends it. If 
 after, it is called quiescent shevoa ; the letter 
 over it does not move, as H.^l dibhrici ^'P^*? 
 iishmee : here the vowel begins a syllable, and 
 the (:) ends it. 
 
 are the same in power, distinguished by the attraction of 
 the letters ^IHK which follow the long vowels, and cause 
 a double sound from that of the short one : no doubt this 
 was the intent of the prophet, Proverbs, chap. viii. v. 30 : 
 y^m h^^ ^•l^?^ " Then was I by him:" the composition 
 of the word *nNl| are the four quiescent letters, tke prin- 
 cipal and most essential to the language, as they are found, 
 in most words, although they are not always expressed, 
 (when without a vowel) yet the Hebrew could not be read, 
 much less understood, without them. H being left out 
 in the first table, notwithstanding the same being found 
 throughout the whole bible after (-) and (-•) as it is after 
 the rest of the vowels, to distinguish them from the short, 
 is a clear testimony that the first table is the invention of 
 grammarians, for the reasons before stated ; and that the 
 second table is the original will, I trust, be sufficiently 
 understood.
 
 30 
 
 ON THE POWER OF SHEVOA. 
 
 Rule 4. — Shevoa is pronounced six ways, 
 viz. 
 
 1. — In the beginning of a word or syllable, 
 as \^S penie. 
 
 2.— In the middle of a word after another (:) 
 as ''"^P'?! yilmedoo. 
 
 3. — After a long vowel not accented with a 
 pause, as ^^'^'^^ tiengoatseboo. 
 
 4. — -Under a letter with a dagesh, as H?^ 
 sapperee. 
 
 5. — (:) is pronounced under a letter if the 
 following is the same, as 177n halleloo ; ^^.}^ 
 heenenee ; to preserve the sound of both similar 
 letters. 
 
 6. — (:i) After (i) metheg, which is always 
 pronounced, without exception. 
 
 The learner is to observe, that in all cases 
 where shevoa is pronounced it does not make 
 a syllable by itself, but is joined to the next 
 letter which ends the syllable. 
 
 OF QUIESCENT SHEVOA. 
 
 Rule 5. — Shevoa is quiescent, first, after a 
 short vowel not accented, ''^"|.P^^ nilmadnoo ; 
 secondly, two shevos in the middle of a word,
 
 31 
 
 the first is quiescent, as ^'^P^^ nil-me-doo ; third, 
 after a long vowel accented with a pause, as 
 »nJtO(5 koa-town-tee ; fourth, at the end of a word, 
 as ^^ at ; or even two shevoas, as ^")^*? oa-mart, 
 ^fHyapht, &c. 
 
 Rule 6. — All letters, except the letters ^'^'^^^ at 
 the end of a word without a vowel are considered 
 as if they had (:), as ^^11 vay-ya-ngas, ^yn 
 vay ya-ngal ; the ^ and ^ sound as if they had 
 (:) : except ^, 2, and \ which for the most part 
 have (:) under them at the end of a word, as 
 ^t^ at, ?^.!] vay-yieshb, 1?.!! vay-yiebht, 1/ loch. 
 
 COMPOUND VOWELS. 
 
 Rule 7. — There are two kinds of compound 
 vowels, 1. primitive, 5. derivative. 
 
 The pri iiitive compounds are placed under 
 the gutteral letters* VnnK instead of pronounced 
 
 (:), thus ^:?3;. 1^'^n *!7n UK, for*^^f^^^ &c. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 * The utterance of the gutterals from the throat is a mere 
 vocal and aspirate sound ; these letters could not be pro- 
 Bounced properly with the vowel(:) the power of (e) only;
 
 The derivatives, — when the same arc placed 
 under any other letter besides the gutterals ; 
 this composition is only found with (-) joined to 
 {;) instead of metheg being placed perpendicular 
 before it, thus (:i): the same line is put hori- 
 zontal after it, thus (":), as ^^l) ^^m for 2r\n 
 yp^^. See observations. 
 
 for which purpose these three short vowels (-) (•) and (^) 
 are joined to (:) to strengthen both tlie letter and the 
 vowel, and thereby preserve the utterance of the gutterals, 
 shevoa being the original vowel whence all the rules of 
 pronounced (:) are observed in the compound vowels, viz. 
 
 First — It cannot be placed in the last syllable. 
 
 Secondly — Two compound vowels cannot come together 
 in the middle of a word. 
 
 Thirdly — No accent or metheg can be joined to it. 
 
 Fourthly — Nodagesh can be put in the same letter. 
 
 FiOhly— Nor can (:) follow it. 
 
 Sixthly — No word can be composed with compound 
 vowels only. These rules are original, the properties of 
 pronounced (:). 
 
 Derivative compounds are placed — 
 
 First — In words wherein two letters are alike, as *'l^n 
 'V^n O^n ha-la-lee, hi-na-nee, ha-ra-ric. 
 
 i!^econdly — Under the participle D in the dagesh conju- 
 gation after H emphatic, as npDDH ; ( :) is put here in- 
 stead of dagesh. 
 
 Thirdly — After ^, as VD^I instead of metheg. 
 
 Fourthly — In words from the root ^^^? he eat, and *]*n!a 
 
 he blessed, comes HiyDKh towcha-la-noh, and *J3'l3n 
 te-bo-ra-chie-ncc, &c.
 
 33 
 
 Rule 8. — 1. A compound vowel in the middle 
 of a word changes the preceding vowel to the 
 same uncompounded, as ^)^1 for ^^^f ; except 
 when f^ is to have (•) the preceding letter in- 
 stead of (••) takes (••), and (••) under ^ is omit- 
 ted, as"^1'^i^Sfor"i1'!:iJ^, and HK^n for nKVa.— 
 2. A compound vowel before (:) or dagesh is 
 changed back, sometimes to quiescent shevoa, as 
 7l!irP for 7iirTj and sometimes to its vowel only, 
 as ItSv: for irSjf^, and V}^1 for '^yr. . 3. Except 
 a compound vowel in the last syllable in words 
 quiescent in third radical ^ as ^^^ ^^}l which 
 in the future ^ and the preceding vowel ( ) are 
 sometimes cut off on account of "l conversive : 
 see rule 60.; the (-:) is there changed to (-), thus, 
 
 hr^ mil for nSivn ntz^ri. 
 
 OF DAGESH. 
 
 Rule 9. — A point in a letter is called Dagesh : 
 if at the end of a word, it is called Mappik, 
 signifying to utter; the H is then pronounced, 
 as n*? loh, n3 boh, which without mappik 
 would sound ^i lo, ^? bo, 
 
 Dagesh may be either single or double : dagesh 
 is single in the letters ^33 "^^2 when any of them 
 
 £
 
 34 
 
 begins a word or syllable after a quiescent (:) to 
 take away the aspir-ale (h) from the above ktters, 
 thus ^.^^S pal-gie "^ISfri tiz-cowr : D n D without 
 dagesli would be aspirate ; thus, phal-ghie, thiz- 
 chowr ; and are therefore called single dagesh, 
 because the letter retains the same single sound 
 hard in the beginning of the same word, except 
 after the quiescent letters ^1^^^ ; as,D"i!^f^~*.^? pe nie- 
 thehowm, l^ ''^"!?^1 venibhrechoo bhechoa, &c. 
 the letters n£3D"T^:i are then without dagesh : 
 to this there are four exceptions : — 1. p''^^ map- 
 pik ;— 2. P'P?'? maphseek; — 3. p^n"! decheek; 
 4. P^nyD ^nf] veoathee merocheek. 
 
 First — Mappik, signilying to utter : i. e. when 
 the letters ^^^^ are pronounced at the end of a 
 word ; as, DTn'niVn betsee-doh toa-sim, ^^t^^ 
 shoa liev bom, ^3 ^"i^ howy col. 
 
 Second — Maphsik, signifying a stop or pause : 
 i. e. if the two words are divided by a pause ; 
 as, n^? ' 'i^J^ ngoa-soo | coa-loa, H'^nn ^h low, 
 tir tsoch. 
 
 Third — Dechik signifying pressing: i. e. a 
 word ending in H with either (r) (-) or ( ) before 
 it, joined to another word by a hyphen (-) ; or 
 both words are accented milngel, that is before 
 the last syllable, whence ^ is crushed between 
 the two words ; as, ^i'^^^ ns-nntp Vi^'T^D ^S n^jr 
 Dn niyxi : this rule includes any letters besides 
 those of HDD m.
 
 35 
 
 Fourth — Ve-oa-thee mie-roa-chik; i.e. the rea- 
 sons of the letters begadcephath being dageslied 
 after the letters *1^^ are from some distant cause : 
 J. if the two first letters. in the second word 
 are alike, as ^?? n:Dp ]11 »ni : 2. if the same 
 two letters are labials, and the first has (:) as 
 ♦'Pl^Dn »3 njr-)fln rM2}^ the reason of this dagesh 
 is to preserve the sound of both letters. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE LETTERS ^''^^^. 
 
 These letters are called quiescent because they do not 
 sound without a vowel point ; as, 1J!!1 boa-noo, Twj goa-loh, 
 1i3 benow, vHK o-ho-lee, and in the middle, as D'Jt^J^")!!! 
 
 ' • t: T ' • " : 
 
 berie-shith ; — except the L tter and the preceding vowel 
 are of different organs, viz. the C) bei:ig a palate, sounds 
 by way of dipthong after (1), (T), (t), and (-) ; as, *1JI 
 gowy, ''r?^ goa-looy, ^ri/f^ clow-hoay, Ollj;? a-dow-nai. 
 (1) being a labial, sounds after (r) () and (-); as, V^'2 
 boa-nov, Vt zeev, w\i^ shoa-liev, wti^n has-lov : the H 
 sounds when with mappik ; as, HS boh, H? loh : the H 
 being a mere breathing of the lungs, has no sound except 
 that which the vowel produces, and is therefore mute 
 whenever it is found without a vowel : the same is observed 
 in K. See table on the vowels.
 
 36 
 
 DOUBLE DAGESH. 
 
 Rule 10. — So called because it doubles ihc 
 letter wherein it is placed, and in general fol- 
 lows a short vowel ; thus, *T^^ lum-mad, "^^l 
 dib-ber. Double dagesh sometimes succeeds a 
 long vowel, if" accented with a pause ; as, ^^^ 
 13p n^l? for the same reason as has been ob- 
 served with regard to quiescent (:), viz. the 
 additional sound produced by the accent is 
 equal to that of a short vowel, after which 
 shevoa or dagesh must follow. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 Double dagesh points out the defect of a letter, ot shews 
 some different meaning of the word, viz. 
 
 1. For the deficiency of the first rad. J as ti^^\ for ^^^ 
 
 2. I' or first and third rad. i as ]n^^ for IHiiV, and nn^ 
 
 for n^nj, r. ^ni . 
 
 3" For first rad. ^, as Hp; for nj^S*, r. Hph. 
 
 4. For third rad. fl, as n^S for rin")3, r" n^S. 
 
 T— T t:— t' — T 
 
 5. For the deficiency of one of the letters in verbs whose 
 second and third radical letters are the same, as H^D for 
 
 nnnp, r. 220. 
 
 6 For the characteristic i of Niphal, as "Ip/H for 
 
 nphn, r. "T^S. 
 
 7. For the characteristic D of hithpael, as HlSjll for 
 
 ynSnni, r. ^nS.
 
 37 
 
 Rule 1 1. — The gutterals "^Vnnx do not regu- 
 larly admit dagesh, and instead thereof com- 
 pensation is made usually in the gutterals, but 
 always in "^ by changing the preceding short 
 vowel into a long one ; thus, — 
 
 Short Pathach (-) is changed into (^) koamots. 
 
 Chirik . (.) do. do. (••) tsierie. 
 
 Koraots (t) do. do. (1) chowlowm. 
 
 Except ^^ and **, which according to the Me- 
 sorah ^^ is found in four places, and *^ in seven 
 with double dagesh. 
 
 8. After 1 conversive to the future, as "1'^K*2*j ^- "^P^- 
 
 9. After D preposition (from), as iHDp for IHS ]f2. 
 
 70. After H demonstrative, vocative, and relative ; as, 
 WD\^^ to distinguish it from H interrogative and adraira- 
 tive, which has no dagesh after it. 
 
 11. To mark the dagesh conjugation of pingel, pungaL 
 and hithpongiel. Sometimes dagesh is compensated by 
 an additional J before the affix : as, IHJ^^D*, r. ^^D and 
 
 ^iinS^*, r. n^tS^. Dagesh is sometimes placed in 
 
 the letters "jD^ at the end of a word, and is culled 
 •^^*"1??D ^*}^pj[^ ^^^ ^^^ ornament of reading ; thus, 
 
 ^D.pi"iK ;;l^i^c mt^p 2irn. 
 
 * Before (») with (:) dagesh is omitted ; as, 7^'1 Tajecbal.
 
 38 
 
 THE DISTINCTION OF SIMILAR VOWELS. 
 
 Rule 1 2. — In the second table of the vowels 
 it appears that these four marks, viz. (t), (-), (v)^ 
 and (•), are the same in both columns : the rules 
 required to distinguish the long vowel from the 
 short are as follows, viz. 
 
 1 . By the attraction of the letters *'i^f*, which 
 generally follow the long vowels ; as, ^^5 boa, 
 np mah, ^l zeh, ^^ lee. 
 
 2. By shevoaand dagesh, which by rule must 
 be joined to the short vowel ; as, 1? boch, ^^? 
 at, "rp?^ nil-mad, V^^ shel-mee : these vowels 
 being followed by quiescent (:) are short — the 
 same when followed by dagesh.; as, *^'l ron-nee, 
 ^^l^^ at-toh, *^^^ lim-mied. 
 
 3. By the accent, which is always joined to 
 the long vowel, including (-) and (••), by which 
 the long vowels are distinguished from the 
 
 short ; as, ^^^'^ doa-bhor, 1*?p mai-lech, ^\}^ 
 law-hat, &:c. 
 
 Rule 13. — (-) is also short before chatuph- 
 komots (-:), a hyphen (-), a mappik (.), and in 
 the last syllable ending in a consonant ; as, Vvl? 
 O'ho-lee, ti^''^^'^ col-eesh, l^njj kor-bon.
 
 39 
 
 Rule 14. 1 at the beginning of a word sounds 
 like u in under ; as, HOI u-mah, ^^^ u-bhenee. 
 
 Rule 15. The distinguishing point on ^ sh, 
 and ^ s, if no vowel goes before it, serves for 
 chowlowm also ; as, ^^^ mow-she, ^^^ sow-nie : 
 sometimes ^ has both points ; if it has no vowel 
 under it, the second is chow-lowm, as "^^^ 
 show-mier ; if it has a vowel, the first is chow- 
 lowm, as D?^^ bow-sem.
 
 40 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 OF READING AND FORMING SYLLABLES. 
 
 Rule J 6. — Hebrew is read, the same as it is 
 written, from right to left* — the consonant is 
 pronounced before the vowel ; thus, ^^5 hoa, 
 ^^ gaw, not oab, awg; except (-) at the end of 
 a word under H, 0^ and 5^, the vowel then 
 sounds before the consonant ; thus, ^ ang, 
 ach, and \} ah. 
 
 * The manner of writing and reading Hebrew, dif- 
 ferent from other languages, is founded on the principles 
 relative to the letters n% the first appellation of the Deity 
 before the creation, shewing eternity without a beginning. 
 These two letters (H*) became afterwards the composition 
 of D'rt/j^ importing mercy and power, the substance of 
 the creation, and afterwards constructed into mn* com- 
 prising the present, past, and future. These three ap- 
 pellations are appropriated to the Deity only ; the first 
 declaring his existence, without beginning, before the 
 creation ; the other two importing his power and existence 
 without end : these three are one and the same ; see Isaiah, 
 xxvi. V. 4— D^aSlV ^n "H rvn *3 " For with the power 
 of n* Jehovah created the world." See observation 7 on 
 rule 60. 
 
 The second remark on H* is, that from the shape of these 
 letters (as marked in the table) the whole alphabet is 
 formed ; hence it appears that the consideration of eternity 
 is found in the formation of every letter, vowel point, &c.
 
 41 
 
 Rule 17. — Syllables are made by the follow- 
 ing rules. 
 
 First — From the power of the long vowel ; 
 as, ^^I'i^ bow-rie, ^^*^^ roa-shie, Hi^n bce-noah, 
 ^'-^^ koa-moo, kc. 
 
 We shall also perceive that the mode of reading Hebrew 
 from right to left is agreeable to the language itself, for 
 the right hand is in preference to the left, as can be proved 
 throughout the whole bible ; I shall cite a few passages in 
 illustration of it : — Genesis, chapter xlviii. verse IS — 
 ")1:)nn ^?1n »3 Wi^^ hy ^^^^P*. a^ " Place thy right hand 
 upon his head, for he is the first born." Exodus, chapter 
 XV. verse 6—^32 niKJ "H ^^fy '' Tliy right hand, 
 O Lord, is glorified with strength." Psalm ix. verse 7 — 
 *^^>J.l ^^JP! ny^in "Let thy right hand save me:" and 
 again Psalm xcviii. ver. J, and cviii. 7, and lastly, ex. 1 — 
 
 *J'P;S 2^ ''^lijh njn^ Ui^: «' The word of the Lord (to 
 Abraham) commanding him to sit on his right hand ;" 
 whence to look up to God we must look to the right. The 
 letters in the word ]'/*J^ begin from the right to the left; but 
 
 in 7X(D^ signifying left, the letters begin from the left to 
 the right. 
 
 The following lines are added to assist the learner, by 
 way of exercise, to make himself perfect in reading, be- 
 fore he attempts any further : — 
 Of monosyllables with one long vowel, viz. 1^f ow, 13 bow, 
 
 N^ noa, np mah. 
 with two letters and one vowel ; as, 72^ el, ]4 hen, Dp kom, 
 
 \f2 min. 
 with three letters and pronounced (:)j as, 7l"lJ| gedowl, 
 
 "?j5D pekad. 
 with two shevos quiescent J as, JlQ^ J^P^^^ ''llil^i*^^^' 
 
 F
 
 42 
 
 Secondly — From the use of quiescent (:), 
 which either begins or ends the syllable ; as, 
 n^Jfn tish-meree, 0^1'??;) nil mad-tern, &:c. 
 
 Thirdly — By the power of double dagesh ; 
 as, ^^^ lim-mied, kc. 
 
 Dissyllables with one long and one short vowel ; as, *)D}^ 
 
 oa-mor. 
 with quiescent (:) or dagesh; as, "T/p?^ nil-mad, 1(53 
 
 pik-kied. ^ # 
 
 Of polly syllables ; as, DD'Hlli"!? ledow-row-thie-chem. 
 
 EXERCISE OF READING. 
 
 \'Zh loa-chien v IDH chac coo-lee DKi ne-um Hlil* a-dow*" 
 nai DVv leyowm VJ^p koo-mee "1^7 lengied *3 cee ^pStt^D 
 mish-poa-:tee ^1D^?^ le-esowph D^ligowyim ^^Ip^ lekobh- 
 tsee nl^'ppp mam-loa-chowth "^D^^ Hsh-powch D^^Sv 
 nga-lie-hem V2VI za-nga-mce 73 col \T\T1 cha-rown ^^^C 
 
 ap-pee ^3 cee tJ^K3 be-eish *^l^f^p kin-oa-thee ^pij^^ tie- 
 oa-chiel 73 col { fl^"^ hoa-oa-rets. Zephaniah, chap. iii. 
 verse 8. — This is the only verse in the bible comprising the 
 whole of the alphabet including the finals, the long and short 
 vowels — the whole composition of the Hebrew language. 
 
 Ver.Oib. »3 cee m oz -jbHiV ehe-powch Sk el, D W 
 ngara-mim HDK^ soa-phoa ^'^'l'i3 beroo-roah N^p7 lik- 
 
 row DSd chul-lom Cti^'2 beshiem "H a-dow-nai 1T3J^7 
 Icngobh-dow D3ti^ she-chem J"Tn{^ e-chod. For the trans- 
 lation of this last verse, see observations on the organs.
 
 43 ^ 
 , ON THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. 
 
 Rule 18. — The letters which are liable to 
 change for each other are as follow. 
 
 1 . Those of the same organs or instruments 
 of speech.* 
 
 2. The four quiescent letters ^^^^. + 
 
 3. The nasals, from a union of sound 4 
 
 4. Those which are similar in shape. ^ 
 
 * The gutterals ; as, ]''K, Hosea, chapter xii. verse 8, 
 
 for prt, Prov. ch. i. v. 13, substance, 
 labials ; as, IJIl, Psalm Ixviii. v. SO, for "liS, 
 Psalm liii. verse 5, to scatter, 
 palate ; as, I^D, Genesis, chapter viii. v. 2, 
 
 for *1^D, Gen. ch. xix. v. 6, he shut. 
 
 linguals; as, HS^J, Nehemiah, chap. xiii. ver. 7, 
 ^ for n3t2^7> Nehemiah, a chamber. 
 
 dentals; as, V!?J^? '* Samuel, chapter ii. v. I, 
 for "ny, Ps. xlvi. V. 12, he rejoiced. 
 + The quiescent' l^ for »; as, Vip^y to do well, Is. ch.i. 
 
 ' V.17, formj, r.-n^;. 
 
 n for 1 ; as, HinS, they shouted, Ex. 
 
 ch. xxxii. V. 17, for 
 
 1V")n, rootm. 
 
 Iforn; as, 1712^, at ease. Job, c.xvi. 
 
 ' \. 12, for nS^, r. nht^. 
 
 ' for-K ; as, jlti^n, former. Job, c. Viii. 
 
 v. 8, for ]'\m'l r. ^1, 
 
 t The nasals ; these are the two letters D and i, whose 
 
 sound is assisted by the nose ; they are liable to chan<*-e 
 
 for each other, as Dfl^^^V for iH^^jr, Ruth, chapter i. 
 
 verse 8 ; and vice versa in Ezekiel, chapter xxxiii. 
 
 verse 26, again Daniel, y^r] for D^p^n, &c. 
 
 § Similar letters—"! & ") ; as, S^?1^ for 7K1jn, Exodus.
 
 44 
 OF THE ACCENTS. 
 
 Rule 19. — Besides the vowel points there 
 are several marks and points fixed to every 
 absolute word (such as are not joined by ma- 
 kaph (") a hyphen) ; these are called accents, 
 of which there are twenty-seven in number ; 
 and they are of equal importance to the lan- 
 guage as the vowels — 
 
 First — To point out the different pauses re- 
 quired in a sentence : the proportion they bear 
 to the stops used in other languages is the fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 TheSilluk N* TH Period . . . 
 
 Athnach . . . . 5)f J | f Colon . . : 
 
 Sokieph Kotown ^4 I f i Semicolon ; 
 
 Rebhingee'' . . . {< V^J J Comma . , 
 
 As much of punctuation as is required in other 
 languages is comprehended in the above lour 
 accents ; but, from the variety of beauties and 
 excellencies, significant and expressive, com- 
 prised in the Hebrew above all other languages, 
 these could not be represented by so small a 
 number as four. 
 
 Secondly — To constitute a grammatical ex- 
 planation, as will appear hereafter. 
 
 There are two other marks, viz. -^n^ metheg (i), 
 and ^pj^ makaph ("). See observation. 
 
 * This accent is always placed in tlie middle of the letter, to.distinguish 
 it''from chow-lowm, which is at the end, thus, rebhingee ^ and chowlowm ^,
 
 45 
 
 The thirty accents are divided into nine- 
 teen kings and eleven ministers : the kings are 
 those which point out the distinct pauses in a 
 compound sentence ; the ministers link together 
 those words belonging to the same subject of a 
 simple sentence : their names and figures are as 
 follow. 
 
 NINETEEN KINGS. 
 
 Second order <{ 
 
 First order. ^ silluk or soph posook 
 
 f^ athnach . . . 
 
 ^ zokeph kotown 
 
 }^ zokeph godowl 
 
 ^ rebhingee 
 
 ^f tipcho . 
 . ^ segowl . 
 r ^ zarko 
 I ^f tebhir . 
 Third order < K telishogedowlo 
 I ^ pozier . 
 L i< pashto . 
 
 ^ shalshaleth 
 
 jlf azlo or gieresh 
 
 ^ gershangim 
 
 J^ yethive . . 
 
 iJ^ pesik . . 
 
 li^ legarmie 
 _jj karniepoaro 
 
 Fourth order 
 
 •^p
 
 46 
 
 ELEVEN SERVANTS. 
 
 ^ kadmo 
 
 ^ dargo . . . 
 
 ^ rnunach . 
 
 ^ maycharciel . 
 
 fj gnilui . 
 
 ^ mercho . . 
 
 ^f merchokphulo 
 
 ^? mahapach 
 
 ^ mengalya • . 
 
 ^? yerach benyowmow 
 
 ^ telishaketano . . 
 
 The art of punctuation is represented by the 
 foregoing accents nominated kings, whose power 
 in dividing a composition of words into sen- 
 tences is distinguished from the order in which 
 they follow each other ; they decrease in power 
 as they descend, thus — the silluk, the athnach, 
 the zokeph kotown, Sec. 
 
 These accents are also Euphonic (producing 
 an agreeable sound) ; for the Hebrew when read 
 in public is uttered by way of chanting, which 
 enables the reader to express himself with more 
 ease, to give due force and exact proportion to 
 each word.
 
 47 
 THE SEAT OF ACCENT. 
 
 Rule 20. — Two places are appropriated for 
 the fixing of the accent, viz. I. ^"17? mil-rang, 
 i. e. on the last syllable of the word ; 2. ^\J^Sp 
 mil-ngel, i.e. on the syllable before the last. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 The usual place for the accent is on the last syllable, 
 and it is never removed from thence except for some gram- 
 matical reason — to distinguish the different meaning of the 
 same word, viz. 
 
 First — To point out the noun from the verb; as, Hy^ 
 accented milngel, is a verb — to consider. Proverbs, chap- 
 ter V. verse 1 ; but n^B accented milrang, is a sub. fern, 
 sing. -^understanding, Proverbs, chapter iv. verse 5. 
 
 Secondly— To point out the root; as, 1^5^ Genesis, 
 chapter xxxiv. verse 29, a verb, third pers. masc. plu. 
 pret. kal. — they took captives, root T}!lp he led captives ; 
 
 but l^tj^ accented milngel, Jeremiah, chap. xi. v. 10 — 
 they turned back, root mti^ to return. 
 
 Thirdly — To point out the dijGferent tenses ; as, ^tD1p 
 Zephaniah, chapter iii. verse 8, accented milrang, a verb, 
 the infin. kal. C) the inseparable pronoun of the first pers. 
 root Dip to rise, that is, when I rose up ; but VJlp Genesis, 
 chapter xxi. verse 8, imp. second pers. fern. sing, from 
 the same root Dip rise thou, masc; ''f2')\> rise thou, fem. 
 
 Thus rvre found instances almost in every chapter where 
 the meaning of the same word entirely depends on the seat 
 of the accents ; whence it is evident, that the accents are 
 as essential to the attainment of a true knowledge of the 
 language, as the vowel points arc to the true reading ; and 
 that both are coeval with the characters can no longer be 
 doubtful.
 
 48 
 
 THE POWER OF METHEG (i) AND MAKAPH (-). 
 
 Rule 21. — Great attention is required to the 
 above two marks, particularly of melheg, being 
 of the utmost import in this study. See absenta- 
 tion. 
 
 The mark of metheg is a perpendicular line 
 under the letter ( t ), the same as that of siUuk, 
 and they are thus distinguished : the silluk is 
 always placed under the last syllable at the end 
 of a verse, the same as a period after the finish- 
 ing of an entire sentence ; whereas the metheg 
 is found in almost every word according to the 
 rule of metheg : if the same is in the beginning 
 of a word under a letter whose first vowel is (:) 
 it is called ^^'3;^^ gang-yoa (:i) ; it is found eighty- 
 four times in the Pentateuch (and no where else) 
 according to the number of the letters in the 
 
 1 10 70 3 
 
 word K^^ 
 
 OBSERVATION ON THE USE OF METHEG. 
 
 First — To discover the rooi ; as, ^^p\ X? they sleep not, 
 Proverbs, chapter v. verse 16, the metheg shews (>) is the 
 first rad. r. ]pl he slept ; but ^^p] ^h they repeated not, 
 Job, chapter 29, verse 22, without metheg, the root is 
 ilitf^ he repeated, (>) is here the formative of tlie future ; 
 the same 1^^")^^ and they saw, root HK"! he saw ; but 
 1^C"I*^ and he feared, root N'n* he feared, tlie metheer 
 shews that (>)is the first radical.
 
 49 
 
 Rule 22. — The use of makaph or hyphen (") 
 is to join two words under one accent ; as, 
 nriD-p-.ni2^0-7X h^n^ 0ii}-mii, when this line is 
 found perpendicular, it is called pesik (a stop) ; 
 the reader must make a long pause between 
 the two words, as if something is understood : 
 Genesis, chap, xviii. ver. 21, ^^7? ' ^^J' literally 
 " Have they done it altogether ;" but the true 
 sense is thuSj'lfi^J^ "Have they done it (presump- 
 tuously);" ^z*? "A consummation or completion" 
 shall follow. See Tarchi on the same. 
 
 Observe, that the hyphen {") joins the words 
 together; but the pesik (i) separates the one 
 word from the other. 
 
 Secondly — To discover the tense ; as, Hlpt '' She has 
 remembered," Lamentations, cb. i. v. 7, third pers. fern, 
 sing. pret. kal.; but TT\'2\ Nehemiah, chap. v. v. 19, 
 >vithout metheg, is in the potential mood, expressed by 
 the additional H (rule 116J " Remember me, I pray thee, 
 (or if it please thee) O Lord." 
 
 Thirdly — To compensate for dagesh in J2 participle 
 after H demonstrative ; as, 1/I?7pn npDfPn ; also some- 
 times under n interrogative and adrairative ; as, tS^^J^H 
 1V'DT\ instead of (-:) : also under the prefixed letters D/DH 
 before a gutieral to monosyllables ; as, DH? HKp «&c.; 
 and before a (-) ; as, ^^"nnti. 
 
 Fourthly — To shew the true reading with regard <o pro- 
 nounced (:), rule 4, observation Q. 
 
 G
 
 50 
 
 ADDRESS TO THE LEARNER. 
 
 The following lines are the elements of the 
 foregoing pages, of which the learner should 
 endeavour to obtain a complete knowledge be- 
 fore he proceeds any further. 
 
 First — To be well acquainted with the Hebrew characters, 
 their names and power. 
 
 Secondly — The distinct power of the several vowel points ; 
 the sound of each to the letter to which they 
 are joined ; as, 13 bow, *3 bie, K3 boa, H^ 
 baw, nS bay, ^!ll bee, and lil boo ; also the 
 rules for the distinction of the long from the 
 short vowels. 
 
 Thirdly — The rules of forming syllables, viz. 1 . from the 
 power of the long vowels. 2. from the use of 
 shevoa (:) either before or after the vowel. — 
 3. by the power of double dagesh, which fol- 
 lows the short vowel, the same as quiescent (:) : 
 this is all that is required to read accurately.
 
 51 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 LESSON ly. 
 
 Rule 23. — The different kinds of words, or 
 parts of speech, being the composition of all 
 languages, are in the Hebrew reduced to three 
 parts only,* viz. 1. ^P shiem, a noun ; 2- ''^^^ 
 powngiel, a verb ; and 3. I^'^P milloh, a word. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. DK^j signifying a name ; that is, every thing that has 
 
 a name, and is varied by declension ; this part 
 includes the substantives, adjectives, and pro- 
 nouns. 
 
 2. 7Vl5j signifying a work, also a labourer, is used to 
 
 express that part of speech called a verb ; from 
 its variations and modification, till it is brought 
 to a perfect and entire state of expression, may 
 justly be deemed a labour : the participle is 
 included in both. See rule 55, 
 3 PiSD, such words as do not admit of declension, con- 
 jugation, &c. are included in the word "H^D ; 
 that is, a word reciting circumstances, which 
 in the Hebrew are distinct words or affixes : in 
 this last are included all kinds of adverbs, pre- 
 positions, conjunctions, and interjections. See 
 rule 96. 
 
 * This seems to be a just distribution of words into their sorts or kinds ; 
 for whatever is, is either — First, the name or substance, the quality or nature
 
 62 
 
 THE DIVISION OF NOUNS. 
 
 Rule 54. — DJif, a noun, is the name of any 
 thing of which we can form a clear idea without 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON NOUNS. 
 
 There are twelve kinds of nouns, viz. 
 
 1. 'p/Sn Di.T op, a substantive common ; as, {!^*K a man, 
 HDnill cattle, H^fl wild beast, f\^V a 
 bird, \*'1J2^ a reptile, PIpV vegetation, 
 DDll silence, i. c. wood, stone, me- 
 tals, &c. 
 
 S.^P'lSn DVJf Op\ a substantive proper ; as, llCt^b Moses, 
 IW an ox, nnX a lion, HiV a dove. 
 
 3. '^^^^^^^ D|2^, a noun adjective ; as, IVO good, Vl 
 
 evil, SilJ great, ^iDjJ small, pS 
 white, &c. 
 
 4. n'npDn Dfi!^, a noun accident — a name derived from 
 
 quality, property, or casualty ; as, 
 nDpn wisdom, ^J'!lJ a prophet, rT*11IlJl 
 strength, Hipt old age. 
 
 5. Din*n Dil^, a noun of lineage — pointing out a par- 
 
 ticular nation ; as, H^V an Israelite, 
 nVP ^'^ Egyptian, &c. 
 
 6. ^*l.t?V^D ^^) ^ noun relative — having relation to 
 
 another noun ; as, HK a father, ]'I1 a 
 son, r\2 a daughter. 
 
 of the thins. — Second, the name of the action, being, or suffering of a person 
 <ir thing. — Tliird, such .words as make no sense by thcmselvcf, without their 
 being joined to either noun or verb to form a complete and perfect sense ; 
 therefore tiiere can be no more than three parts of speech, in which the rest arc 
 comprehended, as will appear from the obiservations on the above divi.'<ion.
 
 53 
 
 the help of another word ; as, 1! a hand, ^% 
 a house, V^ a tree, Pf? a stone, vf? a king, Sec. 
 
 7. PjJTlK^D DK^, a communicable noun — a name in which 
 
 more than one thing is comprehendejd ; 
 as, HT) a spirit, wind, breath, V7)S 
 a rib, a side, lame. 
 
 8. 1TJ3ri DK^, a noun derivative — a noun derived from 
 
 a verb called Heamantiv; as, rTlTp 
 
 east, from TD'^ he shone, 73ND food, 
 from 7DK he eat. 
 
 9. ^"^"^^n Dti^, a noun synonyraa — several names given 
 
 to one thing ; as, {i^Dti^ Din and HDn 
 thesun,* H^IK KJlti^ an enemy. 
 
 10. 'T!J[^'^ C?^5 * noun privative; as, Ti^? light, the 
 
 absence of "^It^n darkness. 
 
 11. '^K^IDH DK^, a metaphorical noun — used figuratively ; 
 
 as, {2^^"^ a head, the uppermost, the 
 
 top, /T)^ a foot, the bottom of a hill, 
 ^7 heart, midst, &c. 
 
 12. "iQplSn DB^, a numeral noun — used in counting, to 
 
 know the number, of which there are 
 several kinds. Sec rule 42. 
 
 • It is very remarkable that the numbers of the three last letters of the 
 above names applied to the sun amount to 365, viz. ^ 300, Q 60, and |^ 5, 
 agreeably to the revolution of the earth round the sun in 365 days.
 
 54 
 
 OF GENDER. 
 
 Rule 25. — The Hebrew language has twa 
 genders, the masculine and the feminine, dis- 
 tinguished by their termination ; thus, nouns 
 ending with I^„ as ^'^'^r\ a law, ^^^ a woman; 
 or in n with either of these vowels before it, viz. 
 Oh Oh U (•-), or (.), as niK a sign, DoSo a 
 kingdom, nnj^ a pit, ^IjJ^J a crown, nn^ a hewn 
 stone — these are of the feminine gender: if 
 with any other letter, they are masculine; as 
 ^'^ a man, l!?,P a king, "^5^ a word, i<D3 a 
 throne, ]^f} a stone, kc. except proper names of 
 persons, towns, countries, rivers, &:c. which 
 may have any termination. 
 
 OF NUMBER. 
 
 Rule 26. — There are two numbers, the sin- 
 gular and the plural — (a few have a dual — such 
 as consist of two by nature, as hands, feet, 
 eyes, kc. also the number 2, two days, two 
 years, 200, 2000). 
 
 Rule 27. — Both the dual and the plural are 
 formed from the singular — the plural masc. by
 
 55 
 
 adding D*. to the sing, thus, "^T a song, O^ytt^ 
 songs, *^?'^ a word, Q^l?! words ; the feminine 
 forms the plural by changing ^ into n and the 
 preceding (-) into C^), thus, ^"^"i^ law, ^\^'^^^\ 
 laws ; the terminations n\ n\ and Hi sing, form 
 the plur. in nVT DV: as nlnnv HIoSd. 
 
 Rule 28. — The dual in both genders adds to 
 the singular D!_, as "^^ a hand, D*"]^ two hands ; 
 7^*^ a foot, D.*i?fi'^ two feet ; DV a day, D'^V two 
 days : the fern, dual changes ^ into D, thus, i^^?^ 
 a year, D^^JK^ two years, plur. -Hli^ years. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS TO NUMBER AND GENDER. 
 
 First. — Nouns liable to dissolve or melt have no plural ; 
 as, nnr gold, P)pD silver, HK^hJ copper, ]D0 oil, \i^21 
 honey, ]♦* wine, &c. and are found in the singular only : 
 others are found in the plural only ; as, D'^3 face : some 
 
 only in the dual ; as, D^Dtt^ heaven, D\*n life, D^*D waters. 
 
 Secondly. — Some are in the masculine only singular 
 and plural, others in the feminine sing, and plur. viz. 
 
 Sing. Masc. Plur. Sing. Fem. Piur. 
 
 ^{J^ a prince, Q^^jjf QJ^ a mother, DlnDl* 
 
 l^j; a man servant, QH^J/ ilHSiti^ a niaid servant, nin£3t2^ 
 
 •••IV T-: T : • t: 
 
 pnt< a lord, D»:ii"Tjjt ^ITJ? * ™''^^'^^' nn?ip 
 
 Thirdly. — Some nouns are in the masculine singular 
 only, and in the feminine plural only, viz. 
 M. S. -|-i^ a pit, -^^ a liglit, rnS a table, ^^^ * ^o»*> 
 
 *■•?• nm-i pits'. niii'igttB. nlm^^awes. nlKni^***".
 
 56 
 
 Rule 29. — Example of nouns with number 
 and gender : — 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 
 A day D1^ S. ^^J? A year. 
 
 Two days . . . D!^^^ D. DlD^f Two years. 
 
 Days ..... Q^P: P. ^W Years. 
 
 A thousand . . ^^f^ S. ^^p A hundred. 
 
 Two thousands ^%)^ D. C)!D{?? Two hundreds. 
 
 Thousands . . ^'P% P. HlJ^D Hundreds. 
 
 Others which are feminine in the singular have a plural 
 masculine, viz. 
 
 F. S. niV a dove, HtOn "^eat, p^t 0'''^. HV*^ an egg. 
 
 M. P. D^jv <^o*"« D^bn — D'D^t "I'vps. D**i*!Il eggs. 
 
 Fourthly. — Nouns common to both genders, some of 
 which agree with the masculine ; as, "IJll a garment, 0^0 
 a rod, npp a staff, &c.: others with the feminine ; as, ||"1N 
 earth, ti^pl a soul, HT) breath, ]pli wine, &c. 
 
 Fifthly. — The five principal members of the body, viz. 
 ^H1 a head, niD brains, .^7 a heart, 123 liver, and US 
 a mouth, are of the masculine gender : the rest of the 
 members are of the feminine gender ; as, "l^ * hand, ]»y 
 the eye, &c. 
 
 Sixthly. — Some have but one gender in the sing, and both 
 in the plural ; as, masculine singular Dyj^ a bone, plural 
 
 D'pVV, and DiDVV bones ; 113^ ayear, feminine singular, 
 
 plural D^^t^and JllJtJ^ years: some have no singular, as 
 D*^9 face J others no plural, as HQ a mouth, &c.
 
 57 
 
 CASES OF NOUNS. 
 
 Rule 30. — Cases are made by particles pre- 
 fixed, thus : — 
 
 Nom 
 
 Gen. '^f of 
 
 Dat. . ■'? to 
 
 Ace. "n.^*a 
 
 Voc. . 'D 6 or the 
 ( "P from 
 l^ in or on 
 
 Abl. 
 
 17? , a king. 
 1^5. V of a king. 
 17.5? to a king. 
 •^^DTOaking. 
 lyjfl^ o or the king. 
 17?P from a king. 
 179? i^ or on a king. 
 
 The same particles are joined to nouns fern, 
 as, O'^^*? to woman, kc.\ also to the plural of 
 both genders, as, C30*7^n O kings, nlnlD^ to 
 laws, kc. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE WORD 
 
 DK. 
 
 * n^, as alluded to in the introduction, is by all gram- 
 marians considered as the mark of the accusative case — 
 sometimes of the nominative ; they also regard the change 
 of (.. ) to (.• ) to be made on account of construction. The 
 design of the author's remarks is to prove that the word 
 DK is not always the sign of the accusative, being found 
 in most places to denote the preposition with, Sec; and 
 that the change of (•) to (.) is of more importance than 
 the mere rules of construction, as will now be shewn. 
 
 There are two roots from which tire word HX has its 
 derivation — First, from the root nJlK an undeclinable verb, 
 
 H
 
 58 
 
 Rule 31. — 7 ^^ ^^ ^"^ ?> ^^<^h often supplies 
 the sense of the rest, except the vocative, and 
 the ^ that of the ablative. 
 
 where the second and (liird radicals arc the saaie, like 
 ^!2D — Second, from the root lllJ^ a sign, quiescent in the 
 second radical T like Dip to rise, or 1 like ^W to return ; 
 whence it will appear that the word D^ has its meaning 
 from the root from whence it is derived ; tlius we find in 
 Genesis, chap. v. verse 22, D^H^N*!! DK "f'On ^'pHnn 
 " And Enoch walked (with) God ; again, Exodus, chap. i. 
 ver. I, "And these are the names of the children of Israel 
 who came into Egypt ^pV^ DK (with) Jacob." — The same 
 is observable in the junction of ^^? with the inseparable 
 pronouns ; as, ''HH with me, '^^l^? with thee, &c. The 
 dagesh in D compensates for the deficiency of one D which 
 is omitted (see rule 64, observation 1 on the verb ^^D ) ; 
 but when the word Dii is derived from Dli^ a sign, it is 
 always used to signify the accusative, and generally comes 
 between two nouns following the verb, to express the true 
 meaning ; as, Genesis, chap, xlvii. verse 6, ^DV Nl^*^ 
 ^' And Joseph brought ^pV^ (^^) Jacob ;" again in the 
 same verse, Hp^l T)^''.! " and Jacob blessed HVID (DN) 
 Pharoah :" in these sentences the object could not be 
 understood without the word Ht^y which is to point out 
 who brought and wlio blessed ; the word Dii therefore 
 in these instances is a just term to denote the accusative 
 case. When the same is used with the pronoun affixes, as 
 ^JliK me, "^nlt^ thee, the word Di^ can have no other 
 meaning tlian the root from which it is derived, namely, 
 a sign to direct the reader. Many more instances might 
 be brought to prove the trulh of this assertion — those 
 adduced will be sufficient to enable the reader to judge of 
 the rest.
 
 59 
 
 Rule 32. — ^The genitive ^^ of, is used only 
 in the Prophets and Rabbinical Hebrew ; in the 
 Pentateuch it is suppUed by an ellipsis ; as, 
 
 Sx-ijp! f?p the king (of) Israel, "^V^ DiV' the 
 
 With regard to the change of (•• ) to (.• ), I shall endea- 
 vour to shew that it is not general, and that in many places 
 the word DK is neither the sign of the accusative nor even 
 the preposition, as will appear from Genesis, chap, xxxvi. 
 
 ver. 3, %r] nl^nKH'SsTIK iriN* '^Vyh^ ^S ^3 " For to 
 thee and to thy seed will 1 give all these lands ;" again, in 
 
 the following verse, SnH nH^niVH Ss DK ^ntS ^rinjl 
 " Then will I give to thy seed all these lands." The literal 
 sense of these two passages seems to be the same : if it be 
 really so, why the change of point under DJ^ ? Since both 
 are in construction and should therefore have the same 
 vowel; hence it will be seen that the word nX implies 
 something more, and that it is often used to signify the 
 whole of the object, as will be evident from its compo- 
 sition, being composed of the first Jind last letters oCthe 
 alphabet, which include the whole language. The true 
 sense of these two passages, will be found by referring t*> 
 Genesis chap. xv. ver. 17, 20, which contain the whole 
 of the promise made by God to Abraham ; namely, that 
 he would give to his seed from the river of Egypt to the 
 great river Euphrates, including ten countries, viz. ^^p 
 
 n^^i? ^pip_ ^m nn£) ^D^y ^'pyi: ^m^ np^ and d^j^dS* 
 
 the Kenites, Kenizites, Kadmonites, Hittites, Perizites, 
 Jebusites, Gergoshites, Canaanites, Amoriles, and He- 
 phaira. This has never been fulfilled, for they pos- 
 sessed only the last seven out of the ten, as expressed in 
 Genesis, chap, xxxvi. ver. 3, where it is said — *' To thy 
 seed I will give those lands ;" that is, the seven last
 
 00 
 
 peace (of) thy brethren — -^^ being understood 
 by rule, viz. — ^Two nouns of different meaning 
 coming together, the second is in the genitive 
 case. 
 
 countries only, for they never had yet possessed any more ; 
 but in the following verse, where God continues his pro«» 
 raise, thus — " When they shall multiply as the stars in 
 heaven, then will I establish the oath I swore to Abraham, 
 and then will I give them ^)^f the whole of my promise :" 
 again. Genesis, chap. i. verse 1, V*l.¥'7 ^— ^''P?^D ^^ 
 *' In the beginning God created Dl^ the whole of the hea- 
 vens, riKI and the whole of the earth," i.e. every thing 
 included above and below — all was created by the divine 
 will at the same instant : again. Genesis, chap. i. ver. 18, 
 " And God made the two great lights," &c. &c. JlK") 
 D^IlDSn " and the stars also," i. e. the whole of the stars. 
 
 Hence the learner will find that in these and many more 
 instances the word Dt^ can neither imply the accusative 
 nor the preposition ; that its meaning can be no other than 
 that which it proves to be, namely, *the whole of the 
 object to which it is joined .
 
 61 
 
 OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule 33. — There are five kinds of Pronouns. 
 1. the substantive ; 2. the possessive ; 3. the 
 demonstrative ; 4. the relative ; and 5. the in- 
 terrogative ; which in the Hebrew are either 
 distinct words called separable, or affixes called 
 inseparable, viz. 
 
 Sepal 
 
 able pronouns, signifying 
 the agent. 
 
 Inseparable pronouns are affixes, which when 
 joined to nouns signify the possessive — to 
 verbs and adverbs, the patient — to infiDitive 
 participle, agent or patient. 
 
 
 1 C. 
 
 ojfc or »:l^^ 
 
 To N 
 Singular. 
 
 1~ 
 
 DUNS 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ac. Pat. Pos. 
 I me my 
 
 
 2 M. 
 
 2 F. 
 
 3 M. 
 3 F. 
 
 riK 
 
 Kin 
 
 Kin or ^^♦n 
 
 in-rr 
 
 T 
 
 1'! 
 
 t: 
 
 V- 
 
 T V 
 
 thou thee thy 
 thou thee thy 
 he him his 
 she her hers 
 
 > En 
 a 
 
 1 C. 
 
 liK or ^im or ^i^niK 
 
 ir 
 
 1J»" 
 
 we us our 
 
 
 2 M. 
 2 F. 
 S M. 
 
 njriK or ]JT^^^ 
 n6n or DPI 
 
 p': 
 
 iD*-Dn-D- 
 
 1D»~Dh»- 
 
 ye you your 
 ye you your 
 they them their 
 
 ■1 
 
 3 F. 
 
 mn or in 
 
 in-i: 
 
 17: 
 
 they them their 
 
 
 The above are the personal and possessive pronouns ; 
 the rest are as follows : — 
 
 The demonstrative pronoun nt this, masc. riKT this, 
 fem.; as, tJ^^Kn this man, ntJ^Kn DKt this woman: the 
 plural niK these, common to both genders. 
 
 The relative Ipij! or the pr .fixes n or fit^ who, or which 
 that, common to both genders. 
 
 * A pause accent transposes (f :) to (:t); as r]S for ?|S and "^^ for ?]3 '
 
 &2 
 
 Rule 54 — An example of a noun with the 
 inseparable pronouns. 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plural.* 
 
 
 SiNG.t 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 My 
 
 A song. 
 
 Songs. 
 
 1 c. 
 
 A law. 
 
 Laws. 
 
 ♦nilin 
 
 
 Thy 
 Thy 
 His 
 
 TIT' 
 iiT' 
 
 
 2 M. 
 2 F. 
 S M. 
 
 
 vni-iin 
 
 
 Her 
 
 T • 
 
 nn»^ 
 
 3 F. 
 
 nniin 
 
 n^nmn 
 
 
 ' Our 
 
 <> 
 
 liTfii^ 
 
 i:nT 
 
 1 C. 
 
 i:n"iin 
 
 ii»nnin 
 
 . 
 
 Yoar 
 
 DDn^jt^ 
 
 DDn»j2/ 
 
 2 M. 
 
 DDnmn 
 
 D:D^ninin 
 
 St 
 
 Your 
 Their 
 
 ]^y^ 
 
 
 2 F. 
 
 3 M. 
 
 
 
 
 Their 
 
 H'^ 
 
 ]nn;^ 
 
 3 F. 
 
 inT'n 
 
 ^n^ni-iin 
 
 Rule 35* — The first vowel [r) is changed to 
 (:) on account of the affix, viz. 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 My 
 
 A word. 
 
 Words. 
 
 1 c. 
 
 A year. 
 
 Years. 
 
 Thy 
 Thy 
 
 
 »• — T 
 
 2 M. 
 2 F. 
 
 
 l^nlia^' &c. 
 
 The interrogative pronouns J *p, MD, nip, who, what, 
 why, &c. 
 
 — < / - 
 
 * The pinral masc. drops Q final before the affix pronoun; the » remains to 
 distinguish the noun pin. from the sing, which causes some change iu the vowels. 
 
 t n> **»« characteristic of the fem. gender, is changed to ^ before the affix, 
 which is never found with dagesh. 
 
 i The interrogatite p|D before a word whose first letter is either ^, ^,
 
 63 
 
 DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule 36. — The particles, specifying the cases, 
 (rule 29) are prefixed to the inseparable pronouns 
 denoting the patient, thus : — 
 
 . Gen. 
 
 ■ Dat. Acc. 
 
 7 «» DN » 
 
 Abi 
 ^ from 
 
 ^ in or on 
 
 
 
 
 ♦— 
 
 'nti^ 
 
 • '^ 
 
 ^niK 
 
 '^^P 
 
 ^•l 
 
 Me 
 
 1 C. 
 
 
 ,1- 
 
 1- 
 
 
 
 
 
 in 
 
 Thee 
 Thee 
 Him 
 
 2 M. 
 t F. 
 
 3 M. 
 
 a 
 
 n- 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 
 nn 
 
 Her 
 Us 
 
 3 F. 
 1 C, 
 
 
 DD- 
 
 DD"?!^' 
 
 D3'7 
 
 DliDK 
 
 DDDD 
 
 DD3 
 
 You 
 
 2 M. 
 
 
 Dn- 
 
 
 
 
 
 Dnn 
 
 You 
 Them 
 
 2 F. 
 
 3 M. 
 
 si 
 
 \^T 
 
 ]^i^ 
 
 \^i 
 
 ]n'\t^ 
 
 in» 
 
 10? 
 
 Them 
 
 3 F. 
 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 First. — The ablative adds i in the first pers. com. and 
 third fem. to distinguish it from the interrogative V2 and 
 HD the rest add only D with dagesh, to compensate for J 
 from ]f^ ; before DH and ]T} the D takes (-) to compensate 
 for dagesh in H being incapable. 
 
 Second. — The dagesh in 3 the third masc. sing, is to 
 compensate for H from KIH the pronoun (him), instead of 
 in^Dp, and is therefore omitted in 3 of the first pers. com. 
 plur. to shew that 12 is the inseparable pronoun (us), from 
 1J^? (we). 
 
 or -|, the J2 is with(T); as, ^li^e HD ^'2'l HD X^i^T} HDI = before 
 n or 3; it is with (•); as, 1i>»n HD ^l^^t is our life? H^Jt^V HD = '^ 
 before any other letter of the alphabet, f2 '^ with (-); as, m"iJ3 HJS 
 iDJi^ nS • *r before a verb or pronoun of the second and third person, it 
 
 takes 0)7 as, Tiin ^D Kin ♦» r\ii ♦»♦
 
 64 
 
 NOUN ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Rule 37. — The adjective, or adnoiin, is ori- 
 ginally masculine singular, and is made to agree 
 with its substantive in number and gender, 
 thus : — 
 
 Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. 
 
 Sing. ^^'^^ ^^ HnlO ^M^ ( hSIIJ 
 
 Rule 38. — The adjectives in the Hebrew are 
 placed after the substantives. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Feiw. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 niD D"i* a good day. 
 
 , nilD nJ2^ a good year. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 D^^lD D^D* good days. 
 
 nl^lD nii^ good years. 
 
 Rule 39. — Nouns denoting employment are 
 for the most part masculine ; as, '^P^ a scribe, 
 DDIti^ a judge, ^^^^ a watchman : they are sel- 
 dom made feminine, as it is not customary 
 
 for women to have those employments. 
 
 Some have a different name; as, "^?,^ a man- 
 servant, nnsii^ a maid-servant, &:c. except a 
 noun of lineage ; as, Hf ^ an Ebrew, H^P an 
 
 Third. — The accusative Jlf^ when joined to the inse- 
 parable pron. (v) is changed to 1, being derived from ^1^? 
 a sign, except in the second and tliird pers. plur. (Ois 
 retained, which in (he third pers. is sometimes regular, as 
 it, is in the table, instead of ]T}r\^ and DHni^*
 
 65 
 
 Egyptian, being originally adjectives, form the 
 feminine singular by adding ^ ; as, ^H^V an 
 Ebrew woman, nnVD an Egyptian woman: 
 plural by adding j-^i* to the singular ; as, nin^iV 
 
 THE DEGREES OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule 40. — The comparative degree is formed^ 
 First, by *^ prefixed to a noun or pronoun, pre- 
 ceded by a verb in the same sentence ; as, 
 liDD npvy '3 '' Thou art stronger than we," 
 Genesis, chap. xxvi. ver. 16 — Second, by the 
 adverb TK)9 very much ; as, "TtiD 'JiN m Tl^l "l?.^ 
 *' The Lord has blessed my master very much," 
 Genesis, chap. xxiv. ver. 35. The superlative 
 degree is formed — First, by prefixing ^ to a 
 substantive preceded by an adjective ; as, 
 D'K^Jl np*n " Thou art the fairest among women," 
 Solomon's Song, chap. vi. ver. 1 — Second, by 
 the repetition of "^^^^ ; as, "^i<? T«?:? ^ni>< ^^n^?^ 
 " And 1 will multiply thee to the greatest num- 
 ber," Genesis, chap. xvii. ver. 2, kc. 
 
 Rule 41. — Adjectives admit of the several 
 cases, like substantives ; as, ^Iton that which is 
 good, 5^17 to evil, ^It^p from good, &:c.; except 
 the gen. 72^. which is always understood before 
 the adjective, the same as before th^ substantive. 
 
 I
 
 66 
 
 Rule 42:. — Grammarians have reduced the 
 several appellations of" nouns (noticed in the 
 observation on rule 24 ) to the number of three. 
 
 First, "129^'^'^ ^^^ a noun expressing number, 
 a numeral noun, divided into figurative* and 
 verbal. + 
 
 * The figurative numbers arc expressed by the letters 
 comprising the alphabet, including the five finals, making 
 a total of twenty-seven letters, which are divided into — 
 
 1 .. 
 
 2-. 
 3.. 
 4.. 
 5.- 
 6-. 
 7 .- 
 8.. 
 9.. 
 
 ..n 
 -. J 
 .-1 
 .-n 
 -- 1 
 -- r 
 --n 
 
 10 .- ' 
 20 ..D 
 30 .. h 
 40 . . a 
 
 50 -. :i 
 
 60.. D 
 70 .. y 
 
 80 .. fl 
 90 .. \f 
 
 Nine Hundreds. 
 
 Thousands 
 
 100 .. p 
 
 « 
 
 200 .. n 
 
 h 
 
 300 . . ti^ 
 
 n 
 
 400 ..n 
 
 i| 
 
 500 .. -| 
 600 .. D 
 
 1 » • 
 ^1 
 
 700 .. ] 
 800 .. ^ 
 900 .. V 
 
 Tlie other form 
 second dii 
 
 Thousands arc made either by units accented 
 or words, as — I II 
 
 1000 - . p)7K K 
 2000 d^dSk n 
 3000 — " \'j 
 4000 — h 
 5000 — 
 6000 — 
 7000 — 
 8000 — 
 9000 — 
 
 In joining numeral letters, the highest is placed first, 
 
 thus— J^'» U, y 12, i'» 13, T 14; and instead of using 
 
 II II 
 
 n* and V for 15 and 16, we say or write ID for 15, and TD 
 
 for 16, because the above letters form that glorious name 
 
 Jehovah, and are therefore omitted in numeration. 
 
 // // // II 
 The present aera, according to A. M. is ^y'^7^ 5576, or 
 
 thus— IVpn n 5576 ; the days of a year are HDt!^ 365. 
 
 t The verbal numbers are expressed by words, as one, 
 two, three; or first, second, third, &c.; and are divided 
 into four parts, viz. the absolute, relative, distributive, 
 and collective. 
 
 1. The absolute is a number fully comprehended by it- 
 self, and has no relative to any other word, as one, two, &c.
 
 67 
 
 Second, DVVn Up the name of a substance ; 
 also called *^?[7 ^P the name of a thing, i. e. 
 eveiy thing that has a name. 
 
 Third, '^i^'inn D;;^ a name denoting the quality 
 of a thing — an adjective or adnoun. 
 
 2. The relative is a number governed by some other 
 word, as first, second, third, &c. 
 
 3. The distributive is that number which denotes a part 
 or portion of a thing, as half, quarter, &c. 
 
 4. The collective is a word comprising many things of 
 different kinds and species, yet is in itself of tlie singular 
 number, as a day containing twenty-four hours, a score the 
 number of twenty. 
 
 The verbal numbers are divided into masculine and fe- 
 minine, each divided into absolute and regimen, viz. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 
 
 
 Femimne. 
 
 
 Absolute.* 
 
 Regimen. 
 
 
 
 
 Absolute. 
 
 Reo:inicn. 
 
 "T^^? 
 
 -THNt 
 
 1 
 
 One 
 
 J^ 
 
 nn?< 
 
 n^^^ 
 
 D^isi^ 
 
 ^;p 
 
 2 
 
 Two 
 
 :i 
 
 O^Pip 
 
 ^np 
 
 r^fjk^ 
 
 np^p 
 
 3 
 
 Three 
 
 ji 
 
 uhp 
 
 tii%' 
 
 ^/?Y^ 
 
 nyy]i^ 
 
 4 
 
 Four 
 
 n 
 
 VTk 
 
 Vi•^? 
 
 n^bn 
 
 ntf^an 
 
 5 
 
 Five 
 
 n 
 
 ^6r} 
 
 j^pn 
 
 f]pp 
 
 ^PP 
 
 6 
 
 Six 
 
 , 1 
 
 ^P 
 
 ^'p 
 
 rif'ip 
 
 nvn^ 
 
 7 
 
 Seven 
 
 r 
 
 v^P 
 
 y^p 
 
 riiip 
 
 r\}Dp 
 
 8 
 
 Fight 
 
 n 
 
 r]pp 
 
 npti^ 
 
 r^vp'h 
 
 nvph 
 
 9 
 
 Nine 
 
 D 
 
 ypn 
 
 ~mr\ 
 
 ^y/z 
 
 ^'^'py 
 
 10 
 
 Ten 
 
 1 
 
 '^'py 
 
 ^p'v 
 
 * Observe in this column from 3 to 10 the masculine ends in j^, the fem- 
 inine is without ,"| except n^'Oti^ eight : the feminine has (... ) before (pj-.- ) 
 n^DK^ to distinguish it from the mascnline, which has (t) nyOti^*
 
 68 
 
 Above ten there is no difference between the absolute 
 and regimen, viz. 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 
 *m' 
 
 y or nnx 
 
 11 
 
 Eleven 
 
 K» 
 
 ♦nii'j; 
 
 ornnj^ 
 
 
 D»it^ 
 
 12 
 
 Twelve 
 
 n» 
 
 
 D^n:!> 
 
 
 n^Sjj^ 
 
 13 
 
 Thirteen 
 
 T 
 
 
 t^^ip 
 
 
 nynnK 
 
 14 
 
 Fourteen 
 
 -T* 
 
 
 V2n^< 
 
 r 
 
 
 15 
 16 
 
 Fifteen 
 Sixteen 
 
 
 n 
 
 .^■^G 
 ^'^ 
 
 - 
 
 nvnts^ 
 
 17 
 
 Seventeen 
 
 ?» 
 
 
 jrntt^ 
 
 
 n^Dts^ 
 
 18 
 
 Eighteen 
 
 n' 
 
 
 n^Dit^ 
 
 
 T 
 
 19 
 
 Nineteen 
 
 D* 
 
 
 j^^ri 
 
 Twenty is made by adding D* to IS^V 10; the same D* 
 is added to the units of the feminine absolute, to form the 
 tens, thus: DHJi^jr 20, D^whtt^-SO, D^n^NMO, U^p^HbO, 
 
 n^pu^ 60, 0'V2p 70, Dobti^' 80, D'vt^n 90, nN,tj"ioo, 
 
 femin. sing., plural DiKD hundreds, dual U^IlijtD 200; 
 ^7K 1000, masc. sing. D^D^N* thousands, raasc. plural, 
 D^^^^? 2000, dual. 
 
 OP THE RELATIVE NUMBER. 
 
 AlASCtXINE. 
 
 
 \>P 
 
 First 
 
 Second 
 
 Thiid 
 
 '>T'2r\ 
 
 Fourth 
 
 ^L^^on 
 
 Fifth 
 
 w0 
 
 Sixth 
 
 ^V^DJJ^ 
 
 Seventh 
 
 '^Dti^ 
 
 Eighth 
 
 *y»tt^h 
 
 Ninth 
 
 *T^^. 
 
 Tenth 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 n\i^ or " nw 
 n^^'pri 
 
 n^Tpn 
 
 A bo ve 1 there is no difference 
 between the absoUite and rfiti- 
 men, and above 20 no distinction 
 in gender. — The concord of nu- 
 meral nouns with other substan- 
 tivcs from 1 to 10 inclusive — a 
 numeral adjective sinp. takes a 
 plur. snbstantive, as D^)^* ^JJJf 
 
 two days, Q^^t^^" HtJ^SijJ '*»•■« 
 
 years, D^J^>i^? r\VT\H fo"' 
 
 • - T -: T T : - 
 mcii ; P|7X * thousand, follows 
 
 Uie aaoae rule, as D^JC^ ^7K 
 • T i-.-iv 
 
 a thousand years, &c. above 10 
 
 ^ the substantive is in the sing, as 
 
 DV 12^ynV3"l{< 14 fJays ; HNVIO too, follows the same rule, Gen. ch. xxiii. v. 1, 
 
 D*i2^ Vi^^VriiK^ DnJi^jri"n:t5^'nK/p "One hundred years, and twenty 
 
 years, and seven year*."
 
 69 
 
 A NOUN OF PORTION. 
 
 By this notin is expressed the part or portion into which 
 a thiiifif is divided : it has two genders — the masc. as ^y^Il"\ 
 the fourth part, ^^11 or n*;^nD half, and SJ^^W the third 
 part ; the feminine is expressed by the r« lative, as staled 
 in the foregoing table, and is distinguished thus : the 
 relative comes after the substantive, as H^VO'^n HitS^ 
 the fourth year, &c.; but the n.mn of portion precedes 
 the substanUve, as I^HH r^pwU!^ the third part of a (mea- 
 sure called^ hin, HSKH DH^K^J^ the tenth part of an 
 ephah, another name of a measure. 
 
 THE COLLECTIVE NOUN. 
 
 This noun is used — First, to express a quantity of weight, 
 measure, or sums of money ; also a certain number of days, 
 monlhs, y ars, &c.; as, VMlli^ a week, i.e. seven days; 
 tt^Till a month, i.e. four weeks; JlJtJ^ a year, i.e. twelve 
 months, or 3G5 days ; /IIV a jubilee, a number of fifty 
 years, &c. — Second, to denote a certain number of a na- 
 tion or thing, and is expressed, first, by the collective 
 noun (all) as Di^H 73 all the people ; second, by the 
 verbal noun masculine regimen, as n1ni7 ♦J[tJ^ the two 
 tables, n'>'p^p \:ii^ the two sheep, D»p^ ri^ two days, 
 yWf2 na^rn 6'bl ntr^ Exodus, chap^ xxiii verse 12, 
 " Six days shalt thou labour ;" by which is understood that 
 the tables, sheep, and days were alike ; but D*^1*)3 D^JJi^ 
 the two cherubims, the one resembling a male, the other 
 a female ; the same is observable in Genesis, chap, xviii. 
 verse 4, O'mji^, H^SlT T]^;:}] " The three men coming to 
 Abraham," each on a different mission- (See Yarchi on 
 the same.) Nouns of this form often admit of afl[ixes ; as, 
 DDn^W WV '* Go ye out, all three of you," Numbers, 
 chap', iii. ver. 4 ; DflVn'^KS HHi^ DID"! " One likeness 
 
 T : — : — : T ••• : 
 
 to all four of them," Ezekiel, chap. x. ver. 10, &c.
 
 70 
 
 THE CHANGE OF VOWELS. 
 
 Rule 43. — Nouns frequently undergo a 
 change of some of their vowels on account of 
 number, gender, absolute, in construction^ and 
 affixes. See the table. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Affixes. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 Construe. 
 
 Absolute. 
 
 Affixes . 
 
 D^jnK 
 
 »^n{< 
 
 □nDb 
 
 nDD 
 
 D^ni^ 
 
 .^n^; 
 
 D^rinx 
 
 onK 
 
 
 
 O'RIV 
 
 »p-rv 
 
 D^nn 
 
 »n^2 
 
 • T ; 
 
 
 Singular. 
 Construe. 
 
 :ii^ 
 
 tirnp 
 
 n^3 
 
 I All niiins of ilija 
 form foltou the' me 
 ADSOinie. j i''t'"'«=»a° >P'e. 
 
 1^1 lA word. 
 P^N A lord. 
 "iQpJAbook. 
 niS«'-ilS"|A heart. 
 J _ is jAn enemy 
 ti^l^pHoly. 
 
 1 t ....... 
 
 :in3 
 
 Justice. 
 A bouse. 
 Wri ting 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 m':i^' 
 nbnS^ 
 
 T — 
 
 • T n • 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 npnSp 
 
 
 nonn 
 
 
 
 
 
 mt2^" 
 
 A year. 
 
 
 Trouble. 
 Altw. 
 
 nca^ 
 
 A lip. 
 
 
 A blescinif. 
 War. 
 Dry land. 
 
 Observe, this is one reason for the change of vowels; 
 there are several other reasons which cause these changes 
 both in nouns and verbs, viz. - 
 
 First — On account of dagesh, that is, nouns derived 
 from irregular verbs, where dagesh is required to compen- 
 sate for the deficiency of a letter, the long vowel is changed 
 to a, short one, thus, sing. 17 pin D^ , plural D^pfl W'lpl 
 
 mnS, rootanS ppn Dn\ "'
 
 ' 71 
 
 Secondly — On account of quiestent (:), which requires 
 a short vowel before it ; as from "^£30 comes n£)p , and from 
 p^V] comes ''p^r}. 
 
 Thirdly— On account of a hyphen (-), which changes the 
 long to a short vowel ; as from 73 HK comes 73~nK &c. 
 
 Fourthly — On account of the pause accent, which al- 
 ways changes the short into a long vowel ; as l^'lt^ for \*'^^?. 
 
 Fifthly — On account of gender, to distinguish the mas- 
 culine from the femin., in nouns hemantiv ending in Ht, as 
 njpD n^nb ; also a few adjectives, as HD^ nj?i"l Pl'^in ; 
 
 being originally feminine, are made masculine by chang- 
 ing the last vowel (t ) into (••) ; the construction in both 
 genders terminates in (••)• 
 
 The author's remark on the above, wherein it will 
 appear that the change of vowels, both in nouns and verbs, 
 in many instances is no other than the production of nature, 
 originating from that powerful unity which exists between 
 the letters and the vowels, the composition of the organs; 
 whence the reader will find the utterance more easy if the 
 letter and vowel are of the same organ, or near each other, 
 than if they were of different organs : this may be ob- 
 served in the two nouns "]7p. and p'Vi the reason of the 
 one( ,.) being changed to (-) and the other to (.) is no other 
 than to facilitate the utterance, the D being a labial, the 
 opening of the lips will produce the sound D mah, as *37D 
 which with any other vowel would not be found §o easy : 
 this case will appear in the sound of ^S^V tsidcee, the 
 5^ will rather have (.) than any other vowel. — The same 
 reason for the change of vowels is also observed in verbs, viz. 
 in the future of kal, hiph. andhithpo. where the formatives 
 take (.) the K will have (••)> because i^ being a guttural 
 will sound much easier with (■), as vK el, ti^K esh, than 
 with (.), as il, ish : thus the reader will find in most 
 cases that the change of vowels is merely to facilitate the 
 utterance of the same letter.
 
 72 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 ON VERBS. 
 
 Rule 44. — A word signifying action or pas- 
 sion is called 73^1D a verb/' varied by moods, 
 tenses, conjugations, number, person, k gender. 
 
 OF MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 Rule 45. — The Hebrew language has three 
 moods— the indicative, imperative, and infini- 
 tive ; and two tenses only — the preter called 
 *^^i^+ signifying the time past, and the future 
 called "^^OJ^ signifying the time to come ;% and 
 
 * The word 7J^15 (as will appear hereafter) is a parti- 
 ciple from the root vVS he worked, whence comes 7^19 
 signifying a man who is working ; from this circumstance, 
 it becomes the term to denote a verb, because a word that 
 denotes action ; the several variations and modifications of 
 the same word, in every part of its inflexion, may justly 
 be deemed a labour. 
 
 t The distinction of time in the preter, namely, the 
 perfect and pluperfect (as noticed in other languages), also 
 the first and second future, are in the Hebrew discovered 
 from the use of Iconversive, CSee rule 65.) 
 
 X Both the preter and the future are often used to express 
 the time present, especially in the parts of prophesy, 
 where the preter is used instead of the future ; also in 
 the poetical parts of scripture, where the preter is used to 
 express the continuation of doing a thing ; also such as are 
 customary, lawful, or desirable to do.
 
 73 
 
 instead of the present tense is used the parti- 
 ciple called *^''^^?* signifying between, i. e. be- 
 tween the past and the future ; it has at times 
 the signification of a substantive. See observation. 
 
 Rule 46. — The root from whence Hebrew 
 words have their derivation consists of three 
 letters, which in general is a verb, expressing 
 the third person masculine singular of the pre- 
 terpluperfect tense, t pointed (-t), as \'?^ he 
 
 * A word in the form of the participle of an active con- 
 jugation ; as, kal. /VID one man who wo;ks, from 7^3 he 
 
 worked ; ^i^'ifi^ one who watches, from 1D5t^ he watched ; 
 pee-ngiel ."^DSP ""'^ ^^*^ teaches diligently, from ^D*? 
 hiph-ngil /nnQ one who causes a separation, from ^"13. 
 Sucli words are often used as substantives, viz. /VlQ a 
 workman, 1/t3lti^ a watchman, "TPyp a teacher or preceptor, 
 "^n^^ separation, i. e. the thing which separates ; and are 
 subject to construction, regimen, &c. 
 
 t That God himself is the author of the Hebrew has 
 been already shewn in the observations upon the shape and 
 power of the alphabet, and upon the remarks on the vowels, 
 &c.; the same will now appear from the construction of 
 this divine language. The root of a Hebrew verb, dif- 
 ferent from that of all other languages, consists of three 
 letters, comprising the third person masculine singular of 
 the preter. This is a circumstance in allusion to the Deity, 
 of whom we have no other knowledge than from his eter- 
 nal existence, viz. that he was, is, and will be ; compre- 
 hended from the three letters of the root T\''T\ he was 
 whence all Hebrew roofs take their meaning, namely, the 
 third masculine singular preter (he) the unknown person. 
 
 K
 
 abode; some have {-•'), as i^7P he was full, and 
 a few (\) as 7^^^ he was able;* see Exodus, 
 chap. xl. ver. 36. 
 
 To this root it is that we must look for the meaning of 
 every word ; and hence we are continually admonished of 
 our dependence on that Almighty Being, who is the source 
 of our existence, and the author of our actions ; this is 
 demonstrated in Proverbs, chap. iii. ver 6, ^OIT ^D3 
 ^^nlmlK ^py Kini inVl «« in all thy wayVknow 
 (acknowledge) him, and he will direct thy paths." The 
 word '^"I'l is often found to express action, the actions of 
 man being in reality his ways. Thus it is said, Genesis, 
 chap. vi. ver. 9, HJ iSnnn D^^S^?rl HIJ " And Noah 
 walked with God ;" that is, he acted like him, or rather 
 in obedience to his will : the same we find by Abraham 
 and the rest of the patriarchs. Hence we are authorized 
 to interpret the passage in Proverbs thus — " In all thy 
 ways or actions know antl acknowledge him (who first acted 
 — the Almighty, the creator of all things) :" impute not the 
 power of action to thy own understanding, but rather to 
 him by whose divine influence thou art enabled to act. 
 See the preceding verse of the above, Proverbs, chap. iii. 
 ver. 5, ]yfr\ hi^ ^n:^n Ski " Do not lean upon thine 
 own understanding, but confide in God." — The root of 
 the Hebrew verbs consisting of three letters, in the third 
 person masculine singular of the preterpluperfect tense, 
 cannot therefore but point out the origin of the language, 
 and keep us in remembrance of our contijiual dependence 
 on its Almighty Author whenever we study the oracles of 
 his divine will. 
 
 * Of the three different forms of the vowel points to 
 the root, those in the form of (- ^) are in general transitive, 
 the action has an effect upon some object ; as, ID^ he
 
 75 
 
 OF CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 Rule 4 7. — Conjugation is a varying of the 
 same verb, in order to express its different 
 mode oi signification. 
 
 The Hebrew has seven conjugations ; three 
 active, three passive, and one which is both 
 active and passive ; their names and meaning 
 are as follow, viz — I./'iZkal, or ^>f3 poa-gnal,* 
 2. ^^*^} niph-ngal, 3. ^VS pee-ngiel, 4. ^VB pu- 
 ngal, 5. Vypn hiph-ngil, 6. ^F^k} huph-ngal, 
 7. Vj/Snn hith-poa-ngiel. 
 
 taught (some person), -whence comes the passive *tp/Il he 
 was taught ; those with (•• t), as |(PJ he was old, )^Sn he 
 delighted, are for the most part intransitive, i. e. they do 
 not admit of a passive ; but those with ( V)> as ^IDp he 
 was little, /ID^ he was able, are always intransitive ; and 
 to know the one from the other, place the in'crrogative 
 pronoun *D who, or Hl^ what, before the verb ; if it 
 m vke sense with either, as /DJ*? TM2 what did he eat ? or 
 *1D^ *D who or what did he watch ? — The answer will be 
 the passive, viz. 1. /DNi "l^^H the meat was eaten, 
 2. "l/p^^i ]^'^r} the flock was kept, &c.; but such as *^Sn 
 he walked, ]ti^* he slept, do not admit of the pronoun *D 
 who, or np what ? such are therefore intransitive, having 
 no passive. 
 
 * The word 7VS is the name of the first conjugation, from 
 whence the rest are named, being distinguished by dif- 
 ferent characteristics added to the above three letters, 
 which are the root, and generally called 7)5 kal, signifying 
 light, from not being burthened with any a.idition to the 
 root like the rest, except the personal terminations.
 
 7t» 
 
 Rule 48. — The signification of a verb according 
 to the conjugation from whence it is derived, viz. 
 
 !• /VB or ^p is simply active; its charac- 1 . 
 
 terislic are the vowels (-t), as. • • ' j -7 
 
 2. /VSi is its passive; it has J prefixed to ) • f 
 
 the root for its characteristic, as. . j ^'^7r | ^ 
 
 3. '^'VQ is active, signifying the same action ^ 
 
 done intensely; its characteristic is 
 
 dagesh in the second radical and the 
 
 . change of vowels, as 
 
 4. /•VB is its passive, it has also dagesh in "j 
 
 tlip cfTnnrl ruAittn] unA the rh,?nnrp ', 
 
 -TD^ 
 
 He learned. 
 
 e was taught. 
 
 He learnt intense- 
 ly, or for some 
 purpose. 
 
 idS 
 
 He was taught to 
 some purpose. 
 
 the second radical and the change )■ 
 of vowels, as J 
 
 5. ^*V5nis active, signifying to cause an- ^ 
 
 other to do; its characteristics are 
 n before the root, and ♦ between 
 the second and third radical, as • • j 
 
 6. /J^Sn is its passive ; it has also H for its 
 
 characteristic before the root, as • • 
 
 7 . /VDnn is both active and passive ; a verb ■> 
 
 m this conjugation signines to act on 
 himself really, or intensely, or in 
 pretence J its characteristic is the 
 syllable DH h'tl'j before the root, 
 and dagesh in the second radical, 
 
 as 
 
 '^.jfCjIin and 7-V9 /'VB are called dagesh conjugations, because 
 the second radical receives a dagesh ; the rest are light conjugations. 
 
 I'tj'^ri i 
 
 ip^n j 
 
 ittSnn < 
 
 He causes ano- 
 ther to learn. 
 
 He was made t© 
 learn. 
 
 He taught him- 
 self intenselyy 
 or in pretence. 
 
 Note.— Some verbs in kal hate tlie signification of nrph-ngal, as ^y^ 
 he was hungry, plti^P ^^ '^'^ ^'^^'^> ^^''' *"*' '**''"^ '" oiph-ugal h;vve that of 
 kal, as yitt>i he swore, DPl^^ he fmiKht, &c.; and some in hiph-ngil have 
 that of kal, as n^Stt^H •»<: threw down, D^Dl^H ^'^ rose early, &c.
 
 77 
 
 OF NUMBER, PERSON, AND GENDER. 
 
 Rule 49.— The variation of a verb* in order 
 to express the different persons, &:c. is a varying 
 of the same verb by different terminations, 
 prefixes, kc. as marked in the following table : 
 
 The Partici- 
 ple is origin- 
 ally in tlieSU 
 person mas- 
 culine sing, 
 aiul iidniits 
 ot' affixes the 
 same as a 
 noun acijec 
 
 tive. See 
 
 rule 33. 
 
 The Infinitive 
 is like the Im- 
 perative : 
 
 it is the name 
 of the action, 
 has one ot the 
 
 letters f2/^li 
 prefixed occa- 
 sionally. 
 
 Future. 
 
 T 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 This mood is 
 in the Hebvtw 
 ill the second 
 person only — 
 
 1 
 
 mas. and fem. 
 sing, and phi 
 
 1- 
 
 n:i_ 
 
 Preter. 
 
 n - 
 
 T 
 
 n_ 
 
 T 
 
 \- 
 
 Dn- 
 \ri- 
 
 He 
 She 
 
 Tiion M. 
 Thou F. 
 I C. 
 
 They M. 
 Fhey F. 
 Ve M. 
 VeF. 
 We C. 
 
 * The mode of varying Hebrew words, difForent from ail 
 other languages, originates from the distinct impoi!*. of the 
 root, which in the Hebrew, as before mentioned, ex- 
 presses the third person masc. sing, preter, whence its 
 modification begins, to avoid a repetition of the same ; 
 whereas in all other languages the root is in the infinitive, 
 having the particle (to) before it, as to be, to do, &c.; 
 neither person nor time is understood : their inflections^ 
 similar to those of nouns, are rendered more familiar by 
 habitual practice. This may be considered as one reason 
 why the varying of a Hebrew root commences in the third 
 person. Another reason of more importance will appear 
 from the author's remark, similar to tliat made on the root 
 
 • The black line in each column represents the three letters which are the 
 root of all verbs; the terminations, made by the inseparable pronouns, are the 
 same throughout the whole of the conjugations. 
 
 t Observe, the postfix J^ to the preter, when joined to verbs quiescent in 
 third rad, {»J or H ** without dagesb. ""
 
 78 
 
 DIVISION OF VERBS INTO REGULAR & IRREGULAR. 
 
 Rule 50. — Regular verbs are called ^V'^p 
 signifying perfect ; that is, such as retain the 
 three letters of the root throughout the whole 
 conjugations, moods, and tenses, and the same 
 are pronounced, — the verb is then regular ; as, 
 
 noS 'im "Tp9, fcc. 
 
 fpage 59J, which will now be fully confirmed by the 
 nature of its inflection, &c.; shewing that the whole con- 
 struction of the language is emblematical, pointing out its 
 author the Creator of all, and that whatever can be com- 
 prehended of the Godhead must be deduced from the 
 Hebrew ; this may be observed in every division of gram- 
 mar, from the beginning of the alphabet to the completion 
 thereof, shewing that there is an Eternal Existence, being 
 the only idea we can have of a Deity — no mortal can know 
 more, even Moses, who comprehended more than any 
 other man. He who could commune with God at all times, 
 see Numbers, ch. ix. ver. 8, "H HV^; HD r^VM^} HDy 
 *' Stand, and I will attend the Lord to hear his commands 
 concerning your claim" — he who received the two tables 
 from God himself, Exodus, chap. xxxi. ver. 20, every 
 direction of the building of the tabernacle with all its 
 contents — he of whom scripture tells us, Numbers, chap. 
 xii. ver. 5, 6, 7, 8 ; from the contents of these verses, the 
 reader will find that God himself testified that his inter- 
 views with Moses were different from those of other pro- 
 phets to whom God appeared by visions or dreams ; but 
 r\pD2 n^3^3.P ^^ " Not so with my servant Moses, 
 13 *^S^K nS ^K nS with whom I spoke like one man 
 speaking to another," (as it were mouth to mouth) not by 
 visions, &c.; D^^l "H ^\m^)^ " Who shall behold the 
 •similitude of the Lord :" yet notwithstanding all these
 
 79 
 
 Rule 51. — Irregular verbs are of two kinds. 
 1. ^V^ quiescent, that is, such as have one or 
 more of the quiescent letters ^1•^^f among the 
 root, viz. whose first rad. is ^ or \ the second 
 rad. ' or 1, the third rad. ^^ or H. 2. ^npn de- 
 fective, that is, such as lose one or more of their 
 radicals, as will appear in the following ex- 
 amples given to each, as far as they are irregular 
 in themselves ; the rest, namely, the conjuga- 
 tions, moods, and tenses, are regular. 
 
 declarations, he knew nothing of the Godhead : see 
 Exodus, chap, xxxiii. ver. 19, 20, 21, 22, Moses en- 
 treating the Lord, saying, ^"lilD HK K^ ^J.^?"^*!) " Shew 
 roe thy glory, I pray thee ;" God answered, ^JK*!! ^<7 ^3 
 "m DIKH " No man shall see me and live." The re- 
 
 • T T T T 
 
 mainder of the above verses contain mysteries almost 
 incomprehensible, at least from the literal translation, 
 except what may be drawn from the conclusion, viz. 
 '1^C'^^ vh 'iSI n'm^ m^ n^^^m " And thou shalt see my 
 back part, but my face shall not be seen."* 
 
 • This is very erroneously translated ; the word ••'K signifies after, 
 behind, the same as JQT which signifies before Hence the meaning of the 
 passage runs thus — " And thou mayest see me ;" that is, thou mayest know 
 that there is a God from the consideration of every thing behind riie, meaning 
 after the creation. Minute attention from man, even to every individual 
 particle of this immense fabric, will point out to you that there is a God : but 
 before me, that is, before the creation, no one can see— even angels are daily 
 askin? each other mI^D DIpD ^^^? " Where is the place of his glory ?" 
 Thus, we are taught to know God is, by descending from him towards his 
 creation; this we understand from the manner of modifying the Hebrew verb, 
 to begin with the root, which is an emblem of the Deity, viz. the Unknown 
 He who first acted ; to know more, is to descend from him to every object 
 of the creation, and thereby obtaia all possible knowledge of an Eternal 
 Existeuce.
 
 80 
 
 Rule 52. — An example of a regular verb by 
 way of abstract or epitome ; as, "^'?? he learned. 
 
 Hith-poi iigiel 
 
 Hoph ng.il- Hiph nifil. I Fu iigalj 
 
 f.ii- Hipn ngii. fa iigaij 
 
 
 "i/!:^D 
 
 td'^d 
 
 Tee n|;iel. 
 
 Niph-ng^al. 
 
 na^j 
 
 Kal or I'o iigal. 
 
 -Tp*J 
 
 "lip"? 
 
 Pretef. 
 Imperative. 
 Future. 
 Infinitive. 
 Participle A. 
 Participle P. 
 
 Obs. First. — Each word in the above table is the first of 
 the same mood, tense, &c. which in the preter, future, 
 and participle, is the third masc. sing.; in the imperative 
 it is the second masc. sing.; place the same in the begin- 
 ning of every black line in the preceding table, the rest of 
 the persons will follow by the same terminations, affixes, &c. 
 
 Secondly. — The above is an accurate table of all regular 
 verbs ; as, 1{5D *^pK^ .&c. by placing the same letters of 
 the root instead of Tp? with the exception of some of the 
 vowels, viz.^1. That the vowel (^) is retained in the pre- 
 ter of kal, except in the second pers. p.lur. masc. and feni. 
 when it is changed to (:) ; as, Dn"lp^ l^"??^ — '^. The 
 termination vowel (1), if the second or third rad. is one of 
 the gutter. VrTHK or "1, is changed to (-) ; as, nf^S PTpS* 
 ym Viy^] n']p nnp^, r. ym nifj np_9; excep"tbefJr« 
 a hyphen or pause, when it terminates with (^ ), as KyHD*. 
 3.— (.) under the formatives of the future of kal, niph-ngal, 
 and hith-poa-ngiel, is changed to("); under K this letter 
 will sound with more ease when with (•) than (.). 
 
 Thirdly. — In hiph-ngil the Ms often left out, and (.)is 
 changed to(..); as, Slljl for Sn^n, or (.,), as "^VIl^ on 
 account of constfuction. 
 
 Fourthly. — In hith-poa-ngiel, if the first rad. is ti^ 2^ or 
 D, it changes place with the n, thus — "IDriSJ^H 73r)Dn 
 npntJ^n from "IDK^ 15ij> SnO ; and if the first radicaf is
 
 81 
 
 Rule 53. — The infinitive is the mere name of 
 the action, called the infinitive noun, admitting 
 of the prefixes ^^^^ ; thus — "^"^^'7? in learning, 
 '^''^'P? as learning, '^'^^^^ to learn, "'WP from 
 learning ; this last is always taken negatively, 
 i. e. that I should not learn : if" to a passive infi- 
 nitive, their signification is passive ; as, "^P^i?^ 
 in being taught, '^^^\^7 to be taught, kc. 
 
 Rule 54. — The infinitive in construction with 
 a noun or pronoun is rendered by the subjunc- 
 tive mood ; as, ^i!^'l|^'?? Genesis, chap. ii. ver. v. 
 literally, " In their being created," i. e. when 
 they were created : ibid, D»nSN"nnl5trir Dvn " lu 
 the day making the Lord God," i. e. when the 
 Lord God made, kc. See observation on rule 60. 
 
 Rule 55. — The participle* is always in the 
 third pers. masc. sing, and declined like adjec- 
 tives ; thus, *^P >* one man who is learning, ^7?^ 
 one woman, kc; the first and second persons are 
 formed by prefixing the separable pronouns to the 
 part.; as, "^P^ ^^^, I am learning, "^^^^ "^^^^ thou 
 art watching, ^H^,"^"^ ^^^ ye men are speaking. 
 
 V the characteristic H is changed to D, which also changes 
 phice with the first radical V ; thus, from fj'lV pljS comes 
 P)")9Vn Pl^"^*? ; and if the first rad. is T , D, or V), the 
 characteristic (H ) is omitted, and compensated by dagesh, 
 
 • So called from its quality in partaking of tlie nature of both noun and verb. 
 
 t Words of this form are often taken for uiph-nijal from ihe sinrilarity of 
 
 the vowels and dagesh, and can only be distinguished from the sense, as Numb. 
 
 ch. xxii. V. 25, "^^pH Sj^ VnSril " And she thrusteth herself unto the 
 wall;" the dagesh in 7 compensates for J^ of bitbpo. instead of <» v ; • -•
 
 82 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Rule 56. — Example of" a quiescent verb, C) 
 first radical ; as, ^^l he sat down. 
 
 Hith poa-ng > i 
 
 Miiph ngal 
 
 2m 
 
 2m^2 
 
 H oh ugil. j Hu ugal. 
 
 
 :itJ^'o 
 
 Fee ni^iel. 
 
 ■ W: 
 
 2^y 
 2^2 
 
 Ni|ib imnl, Kal or Poa-n^ai 
 
 — — 2^' 
 
 nj:^ii 2V2^' 
 
 Prcter. 
 Im|ierativc. 
 Future, 
 fjifinitive. 
 Participle A. 
 Participle P. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS, AND EXCEPTIONS TO THE ABOVE. 
 
 1. Verbs with* first radical are regularly declined in 
 the preter and participle of kal and in Ihe dagesh conju- 
 gations ; the iiiperalive, future, and infinitive of kal * is 
 omitted, the infinitive adds D with two (, ) before it, as 
 n^Ji^ sitting, except such whose second or third radical 
 is n or y, they terminate with (-), as nV"! riiJ^"!*? from 
 V1\ — 2. In niph-ngal, hiph-ngil, and huph-ngal, * is 
 changed to"), which in th- preter and participle of niph- 
 ngal and in all hiph-ngil is 1, and in all huph-ngal 1 ; but 
 in the imperative future and infinilive of niph-ngal the 1 
 becomes a consonant, receiving a vowel, and regularly 
 declined, thus, l^JlH, &c; like I^Sh'.— 3. The prefixes 
 *^i^2^^^ to such verbs with ^ first radical take a long vowel 
 to compensate for % thus in the future of kal the forma- 
 tives have (.. ), as yj^^^ *^V instead of (.), except the root 
 b^y he was able ; in kallhc letters JD^K take % as *?DV he 
 shall be able, &c. — 4. These four, viz. ^^ he gave suck, 
 ^V he howled, ID* he did good, and */p^ he turned to 
 the right, in hiph-ngil the formatives^ have (..), and * is 
 for the most part retained, as Il^p^H VtH ^'p^H &c.— 
 5. The root J»?1* he feared, retains * with its regular vowels
 
 83 
 
 Rule 5 7. — Verbs whose first radical is ^^ are 
 but few that will admit of tlie several conjuga- 
 tions, fcc; those which are found follow the re- 
 gular table of "^1^^, except these fivei viz. ^^^ 
 IDi} ^DK "in^ najj ; in the future of kal the letters 
 :ln»^? take \ as ^?«' "^^^'^ kc.\ these three, viz. 
 ^l)^ ^U^ ^P¥ sometimes follow this rule, as 
 TniW Psalm cxxxvii. ver. 9, except when ^? is 
 to have a compound vowel, on account of its 
 being a guttural, as ^D.?^.!] and "^'Ptf^l : in the fu- 
 ture of kal and pee-ngiel ^^ is omitted in the 
 
 first person thus, as "TM ^5« for "^^^^N ^5^^ ; the 
 rest of the conjugations are regular. 
 
 in the future of kal, as J«J"** KT/^ &c. in the imperative 
 it is ^J1^ fear thou, plural Mil'' fear ye, and is read thus, 
 yeru, yi\ as if {^ were omitted, to distinguish it from the 
 future, which has the same letters, as, IK"!' they shall fear ; 
 
 the * having metheg, shews that the first rad. '> is omit- 
 ted ; but ^ti'^\ they shall see, from HKI he saw, * having 
 no metheg, shews ^ to be (he formative of the future. — 
 These seven having ^ first rad. viz. ti^y ^Jl' "fD^ IT IP 
 
 " •• T — T — T — T — T 
 
 ^K* and |K^^ retain "* and are regularly declined. These 
 four, V']'' ny "ID^ HT in hithpoangiel ^ is changed to 1 
 consonant", thus yiTHH n3T_nn "IpiriH HTinH. 
 
 Note. — The root ^7* and ^^H have the same meaniisg (he walked) ; in 
 
 kal, th« prcter and present are maile from "l^H *'i"s HD /H DO /iH 
 
 Ij— T ' ! "^ •■IJJ ■ •■ 1 
 
 &c. the imperative, future, infinitive, from *T1'' thus, 'T^ '37 5 ^"•^' "17* 
 
 *1 7PI the infinitive sometimes from both, as fl^^ or ^i /H g"i"g ; ^^^ rest 
 of the conjugations are some from ^S^ as hiph. 'l*7"in ''^*^ ^^tJ^lH 
 some from "l^H as hithpoanniel, "iSniin the learner v ill easily discover 
 the root by attending to the abstracts of each. Some verbs of this form are 
 regular in the imperative and future of hiphni;il, as fmm '«^ he was up- 
 i"'?'''! l^V* I'e went out, which in the imperjiive of hiphngil comes "^J^t^^H 
 caase to be riyht, and {>^V*n cause them to go out, Genesis, ch. viii. v. 16, 
 and in the future ')"\»tJ^»» like TJ^pD' ^^'
 
 84 
 
 Rule 58. — Of a verb quiescent in the Sdrad. 
 
 Ilitli poa II. U- 
 
 D^ipnn 
 
 u| b iigal Hipli ngA. 
 
 DPin 
 
 Dpin 
 
 DPID 
 
 D'p; 
 
 D'p/i 
 
 Pa ngal. Pee iigiel. Niph ngal Kil or Poa n,' 
 
 DOip; DIDip 
 
 DOip^: Dpip!; 
 
 D?Jlp' aioip 
 
 aaipp 
 
 D/::ipd: - — 1 
 
 Dip: 
 
 oipn 
 
 Dip^ 
 
 D"ipn 
 
 Dip: 
 
 Dip 
 
 Dip' 
 
 Dip 
 
 Dp. 
 Dip 
 
 Freter. 
 Imperative. 
 Future. 
 Infioitive. 
 P irticiple A. 
 Participle P. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS AND EXCEPTIONS. 
 First. — Such verbs as have the vowels lor 1 in the place 
 of the second rad. and tliose with *— , the root in a'l dic- 
 tionaries is ill the infin.; as Dip to rise, ^^tl^ to return, or 
 ]'2 to consider. In the preter of kal 1 or 1 is changed to 
 (/), as Dj^ y^^ V^» except these five, ")^^^ m2 lit 2X0 ^VJ 
 
 retain i in the pret. and part, of kal, as PS^"]-! D^tl>i2 Ht^'in 
 
 L ■ ■ • • ■" ' '' 
 
 DvID &c. The verb ^\^D T in the preter is changed to (..) 
 
 as T}J2, and 1 is sometimes changed to (.. ) as *J2^? DP* Ge- 
 nesis, chap, xxvii. ver. 31. 
 
 Secondly. — The formatives of the future in kal and 
 hiph. have (t ) distinguished by the next vowel, which in 
 kal is 1 or "i, and hiph. (— ) ; the letters J^)'^f in kal and 
 hiph. have sometimes (••), as Il'O^ ^^2^ ; these two verbs 
 
 arc found in the lexicons derived from two roots, as HID 
 and 2D* to be good, ^^'^ and tt^2' to be ashamed. 
 
 Thirdlv. — 1 conversive changes T or 1 in kal to short (^ ) 
 as Dpn ; in hiph. *- is changed to(r), as DJJ^n for D*K^n 
 
 'tT- ■ V T— • T— 
 
 the same if before a hyphen, as ^^^~^^*, and in hiph. as 
 i^J~2(^^' except with a final termination, as 121ui'*1 ItDlp-l. 
 
 Fonrthly. — Words of two consonants, and i instead of 
 second rad. the noun and the verb are the same ; as, '^^^f 
 lit:h% also to shine, HID good, also to be good, except 
 pin a statute, from ppj]. 
 
 Fifthly.— Those with ( ♦-), as ]''2 1*C^ 1*0 retain ( t^) "i 
 
 general, as *1*Dn "l*ti^* ^21^ ; the fi,rniatives take the same 
 
 vo\\o\ ns those quiescent in 1 or 1. 
 
 Sixthlv. — Such as have 1 or * consonant, as H*K V)^ V^^ 
 
 are regularlv declined, as T\V^^ 'nil*X Sec. 
 
 Seven Illy. — i is inserted before the personal pronoun 
 in the first and second pcrs. sing, and plur. of the preter of 
 
 ^ niph. and hiph. as nirip3 *nVJ^pn iniD*pn &c.
 
 85 
 
 Rule 59.- 
 radical ^. 
 
 -Of a verb quiescent in the third 
 
 Hith po-i ngifl 
 
 Haph ugal. hiph ngil. 
 
 
 Pa-Dgal. I Fee-ngiel. 
 
 — HI N-vp 
 
 Ki-^D 
 
 X*:;aDi 
 
 -'N-^DD 
 
 
 Nipb nga). 
 
 K>fD: 
 
 Kal or Poa.usal. 
 
 Preter. 
 Imperative, 
 Future. 
 Infinitive. 
 Participle A» 
 Participle P. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS AND EXCEPTIONS. 
 First. — The vowels in this verb are the same as in the 
 regular, except — I. the termination vowel (-) is changed 
 to (t) on account of K which will rather have (t) before it 
 than (-) or 1. — 2. In tlie infiri. of kal 1 is retained to dis- 
 tinguish it from (he imper. — 3. These fourK*!' K^2^ NQD 
 
 J^Sd retain (•) in the pret. of kal, as Hl^"!* n&Srj'^nj^ii!? 
 
 •• T •" ' T •• T T •• T •_ j "T 
 
 4. The infin. of kal often terminates in Di^, as Dt^/p 
 
 Secondly. — i< is retained throughout the whole conju- 
 gations ; it is never omitted, neither does it change for any 
 other like those quiescent in the letters ^IH, except these 
 two, i^tjn and J<^^, in which J< is once omitted, as ^Hif* 
 for *nKY; and iDnP for iNDHp. 
 
 Thirdly. — The root ^?'^p retains the twoCr) in the pret. 
 of kal, as1h?'l(5; and in niph. the second (t) is changed to 
 (..)as^r)i^'1p^ 'IJ^'lp^ &c.;, the part. fem. often terminates 
 in n instead of H, as n^?^Di DX^lpi &c. 
 
 Eighthly. — Verbs with 1 or 1 for the second rad. the 
 third fem. sing. pret. and part, of kal are the same, distin- 
 guished by the accent ; thus, if milngel the verb is in the 
 pret., and if the accent is milrang it is in the participle ; 
 
 as, ri/^p she did rise, but HDp she is rising, Genesis, 
 
 chap, xxxvii. ver. 7 ; the same HNl Sll"!! Rachael is 
 
 coming, but n>?3 /Pm Rachel came. Gen. xxix. v. 7, 9. 
 
 Ninthly. — In the dagesh conjugations the third radical 
 
 is doubled, as DDlp to compensate for dagesh in the second 
 
 radical, which ^is a vowel ; some double both rad. letters, 
 as SdSp from Sl3.
 
 Rule 60. — An abstract of a verb quiescent in 
 the third radical ^. 
 
 ni 
 
 Hith poangiel. 
 
 Hiipt^ngaU 
 
 
 nbOifz 
 
 Hiph iigil. 
 
 niSjn' 
 
 Fu Dgal. 
 
 
 n^jD 
 
 Pee-nniel. 
 
 niSi 
 
 Niph ugal 
 
 nlSiin 
 
 n^jij 
 
 
 Prctcr. 
 Iiiipcialive. 
 P'utuiT. 
 Infinitive. 
 Participle A. 
 Paiticiple P. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS AND EXCEPTIONS. 
 First. — That the third rad. H is only found in the third 
 masc. sing, of every conjugation. In the third fem. H is 
 changed to D, as Hri/J nri/JJ &c. In the iirst and se- 
 
 " ' T :|T T ; : • ! 
 
 cond pers. sing, and plur. H is changed to % as HvJ &c. 
 except in the third pers. plur. com. the third rad. is omit- 
 ted, as l/J Sec. except HDn retains *, as VDH 
 
 ' T * TJT ' T|T • 
 
 Secondly. — In verbs of the above form the vowels of the 
 first syllable are regular throughout the whole conjuga- 
 tions — the last of the preter in (r), the iraper. in (••), the 
 infin. in Dl, and fl is omitted j the future and participle 
 in(v). 
 
 Thirdly. — Tn the r. H?!^ the H is changed to T con- 
 sonant, as T})?^ present kal ; the verb Hflti^ in hithpoa- 
 ngiel 1 consonant is inserted between the second and third 
 rad. as n"]nri{i^J<, except at the end of a word it is 1, as 
 innti^'l *' And he bowed himself," Genesis, ch. xiii. v. 7. 
 
 Fourthly. — In the irnper. of peengiel, hiph. and hith. 
 n is of<en omitted, as 7J -md /ISIT} for H*?^ and n^Jinn , 
 ^Vn for T^bV\^ ; some have (.,), as t]*)n for HS^in &c. 
 
 Fifthly. — 1 conversive to the future or the negative par- 
 ticiple 7K not, before the future causes the third rad. H to 
 to be omitted with the preceding vowel (•.), as 73)1^ for 
 n7D)T^ ; sometimes (v),and the preceding (.) are transposed, 
 as ^Q*T for H^Dn ]Dn ^^C ; except under V and !!, which 
 terminates in (.), as Wn ]nn ^V.^T &c.; the root HJjn he 
 saw, the formative of the future in kal takes (-) like hiph.
 
 B$ 
 
 Rule 61.— If the letters ^l^K are found among 
 the root different from those before noticed, viz. 
 
 to distinguish it from root Nl^ to fear, thus t^JVI and he 
 saw: it is everywhere irikal, except II. Kings, chap. xi. 
 ver. 4, where it is in hiph. " And he shewed," &c. 
 
 Sixthly. — If the second rad. is H 3 ^ they terminate in 
 quiescent (:), as ^\^''^ Htl^*! "1^*1 ; this P! is sometimes 
 omitted, even without ^ conversive or /^, as yi\ for H^*!* 
 and K^for ny^\ 
 
 Seventhly. — -The roots T^")! he was, and Pl^n he lived, 
 
 *' T|T ^ TJT ' 
 
 admit of all the foregoing rules of quiescent verbs in the 
 third rad. H, except — I. That (:) under the first rad. after 
 any of the formatives, which in all such verbs in the form 
 of the above table is quiescent (:), as T\7^\ &c., is .pro- 
 nounced in the above H^n and (TTl, thus,. n^H' n^HJI H^n^ 
 
 T|T T|T ' ' :• :|- V :i • v;! • 
 
 2. In the third fem. of the preter H is sometimes left out 
 entirely, as ^m for H^m Exodus, chapter i. verse i6. — 
 
 ' T|T T T T ' 1 
 
 3. In the participle of kal * is changed to "I consonant, a^ 
 nYn he is, for H^h . — 4. 1 conversive to the future of the 
 above two roots n^n and Pl^n, which besides the omission 
 
 T|T T|T ' 
 
 of il according to rule, causes also a transposition of the 
 two remaining vowels, thus *n*1 and WT^ for ^PI^I and *n*T; 
 this form is found even without T conversive, as ^H* and 
 W for *n^ and ^Pt*. The reason assigned by grammarians 
 for the transposition of the vowels in the above two verbs, 
 is on account of the gutturals H and H, these two letters 
 being more aspirate than the rest of the alphabet, will 
 rather have any vowel than pronounced (:). Hence the 
 above contraction, as also the transposition of the vowels, 
 for which no reason has ever yet been assigned, gramma- 
 rians imputed to (he better pronunciation, consistently 
 with the observations on rule 45, viz. that the change of 
 vowels so often met with in this sacred study is the most 
 powerful evidence of its divine authority. God created
 
 88 
 
 whose first rad. is 5^, as IP^ he turned, ^Iv' Jie 
 slew ; whose second rad. is ^^ or ^, as ^^p he 
 
 man endowed with every faculty, of which the power of 
 speech is the most essential, the intelligibility of which 
 d«pendis on the influence of utterance, the production of 
 nature being conformable to that holy language, of which 
 Gotl is the author. Jt is in this language only where the 
 modification of the same word, in order to express its 
 various meaning, is a diversification of sound produced by 
 the change of vowels ; as, ^7D (raoa-lach) he reigned, and 
 *?|7p (mai-lech) a king : in such instances the change of 
 vowels is consistent with the rules of grammar; but in 
 cases for whicli no reason can be ascribed (see rule 43^, 
 such must be attributed to the power of nature, whence 
 grammarians derive the above change in ^n| and ^n\ being 
 the only cause they could assign. 
 
 The author, in the pursuit of his study in this divine 
 language, has discovered a reason of more importance, 
 deduced from the most powerful arguments. First, from 
 the sense of these two words ; secondly, from the muta- 
 bility of the rule. With regard to the first, the reader 
 will observe that the roots H^il he was, and Il^n he lived, 
 are the same ; for whatever is, exists, and whatever exists, 
 lives ; whence to be and to live are one and the same : 
 there is also a similarity in the two words themselves, both 
 in shape and sound. These two verbs are distinctive in the 
 future ; thus, when used by God, as Genesis, chapter i. 
 verses 3, 6, 14, "llK ^r}\ " Let there be light," TpT *n* 
 " Let there be an eximnse," nlllNp ^H* " Let there be 
 luminaries." The word T\\ expresses command ; but 
 where the same is used by man it is in the optative mood, 
 as Exodus, chap. x. ver. 10, DDDV "H ^7}] " May the Lord 
 be with you ;" and L Kings, chap. viii. ver. 57, "PI *n| 
 'DDV ^yr^h^, " May the Lord our God be with us,"&c.'
 
 89 
 
 asked, ^i?? he terrified ; also whose second rad. 
 is * or T consonant, as ^l^ he hated, VJ^ he va- 
 
 whence it will appear that the above reason for the trans- 
 position of T\\ for ''T\\ namely, for the better pronunciation, 
 cannot be applied to the Deity, by whom the word 'H^ was 
 first used at the creation, as before stated ; after which the 
 same verb is found in its original form, as Exodus, oh. iii. 
 V, 14, fT^^i},^ ". I am, or I will be ;" and Exodus, ch. xx. 
 ver. 3, f\iii^^ ^^ " There shall not be to you," &c. Hence 
 it is evident, that the rule of contraction of the word, and 
 the transposition of the vowels, is not general, but that th^ 
 same proceeds from some other cause will appear from the 
 remarks the author has made on the following passages, 
 beginning with the first verse in the bible : — " In the be- 
 ginning God created," &c. The word H^ti^i^'^lll being 
 composed of ^ in or with, and D^ti^K'n a substantive fem. 
 in construction, signifjing beginning, also the first, from r. 
 2i^^^^, and is in general followed by another noun, as Jere- 
 miah, chap. i. ver. 1, D'p^H^ n?,*?^^ ^V^l^ "-In the 
 beginning of the reign of Jehoyachim ;" again. Proverbs, 
 chap. i. ver. 7, " The fear of God DVl n'>m'^^ is the be- 
 ginning of wisdom :" the word n'ti^t^*) alludes to priority; 
 and since there was nothing prior to the creation except God, 
 who is called D't^t^'^. being the first cause of all things, 
 from hence the word r)^ti^")3 derives its meaning, as will 
 appear from the conclusion. 
 
 The next remark is on Genesis, ch. ii. ver. 4, " These 
 are the production of the heavens and earth, DN'lIinS 
 
 T :|T • : 
 
 (literally) when they were created," and, according to the 
 rule of grammar, in their being created ; neither of these 
 bears sense with the rest of the verse. The mystery of this 
 word is notified by the letter (n), which in all printed 
 bibles is of less size than the rest of the alphabet ; the pur- 
 port of which will be found the object of this observation.' 
 
 M
 
 90 
 
 nished ; such verbs are for the most part regular, 
 except, J. the termination {"i) is changed to (-) 
 
 The third remark is on Isaiah, chapter xxvi. verse 4, 
 D'fDh'W "11^ "H n»H *D " For with H* yoh the Lord created 
 the Avorld :" the meaning of this verse appears very unin- 
 telligible. 
 
 The/ourth and last remark is on Psalm xxxiii. verse 6, 
 O^y^ Ss VB nmi Ito D^DtJ^ "n -inin ''By the word 
 of God the heavens were made, and by the breadth of his 
 moulh all the hosts of them." The difficulty of this verse 
 is, first, to know the word by which the heavens were made ; 
 secondly, how to apply the latter part of this verse to the 
 Dcily. These are phrases peculiar to the Hebrew lan- 
 guage, which in many places cannot be literally compre- 
 hended. Innumerable instances might be produced to 
 shew the inconsistencies, improprieties, and obscurities, 
 which must often occur to the mind of an attentive reader, 
 occasioned from an incorrect and unintelligible translation, 
 originating from the translator not being fully conversant 
 with the true import of the original. 
 
 Such has been the principal object of the preceding 
 quotations, whence it will appear, that the comprehen- 
 sion of the above four verses depends on the knowledge 
 of one word, viz. the first and only appellation of the 
 Deity — the word H*, for the import of which see page 
 19, where the reader will find that these two letters are 
 emblematical, representing the Eternal Existence ; and 
 in observing these two characters attentively, the know- 
 ledge of eternity will present itself ; as will appear 
 from the explanation of these verses, viz. D^K^K'^.^ with 
 (he first ; here the reader will observe, that there is but 
 one who is called n^tf^K") emblematically H* comprising 
 eternity, i. e. with that power of H* namely, with his own 
 power, created he the world. This will be more fully
 
 91 
 
 on account of ^f, as ^^^ for 7lK^ second masc. 
 imper.; 2. that -^ instead of quiescent (:) takes 
 a compound vowel, as I^l] kc. 
 
 elucidated by the next remark. The word Df^'^lUnS 
 
 . . . T :iT • ; 
 
 viz. 11 with, n i. e. with that aspirate sound hee or yehee 
 t^")3 created he 0^ thera : the point (•) the mark of* yud, 
 when joined to H, before or after, produces the sarae 
 sound as when placed under. This is confirmed by the 
 third remark, viz. D^dSiV "nVi; "H H^n *D for with H* i. e. 
 with the power of H* being the composition of ^H* a word 
 used by God at the creation, alluding to the fourth remark, 
 viz. " By the word of God the heavens were made :" this 
 word is specified in the latter part of the verse, namely, 
 " by the breadth of his mouth," i. e. a word distinguished 
 from the breathing of the lungs, peculiar to the Hebrew 
 language, thus, H hee, or ^H^ yehee, being the only word 
 in the bible whose sound is produced by nature : the same 
 was used by God at the creation, as before noticed, to shew 
 by what facility this wonderful performance came into ex- 
 istence, — namely, by the sound yehee, the production of 
 nature, being the representation of eternity : this could 
 not have been comprehended had the word remained in its 
 original state, H^.n* or *n\ The contraction of the word, 
 as also the transposition of the vowels, is therefore con- 
 sistent with the above quotations.
 
 92 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 ON DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 Rule 62. — Defective verbs are such as lose 
 one or more of their radical letters, either first, 
 second, or third ; some which lose both first 
 and third radical i an example of each will 
 be given, as far as they are defective in them- 
 selves; conjugations, moods, and tenses omitted, 
 which are regular, like those of the foregoing 
 examples. 
 
 ABSTRACT. 
 
 Hith-poa nglel Hiiphngal. Hiph iigil, r\i-nc:;il. Pee-ngicl. Nipli-njal. Kalorl'oa 
 
 
 m'n 
 
 
 
 m: 
 
 
 
 "T * 
 
 
 Pretcr. 
 Imperative. 
 Future. 
 Infinitivr. 
 Participle A. 
 Participle P. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 First. — Defective verbs in first rad. i arc regular in the 
 preter and participle of kal; in the light conjugations i is 
 omitted, and compensated by a double dagcsh after any of 
 the formatives, except the second rad. is one of the letters 
 y^^^e, they are then regular, as UV)'', :\r})'> i(^y r. DVJ 
 Jjni ^^?J ; also in verbs in the form of Dip, as Dl^' Tl^n r.
 
 93 
 
 Rule 63. — Defective in the first rad. are such 
 whose first letter of the root is ^, as ^^i he ap- 
 proached, one with 7, as Hi^^ he took, and nine 
 with \ which are in general omitted ; and after 
 
 Secondly. — The vowels are regular, except — 1. where 
 the first syllable in regular verbs ends in quiescent (:) ; in 
 the above it ends in double dagesh, as ti'^iin hig-gish, like 
 
 "TVJ?!^ hil-mid. — 2. The iraper. and infin. kal terminate 
 in (..), and H is added to the latter, as ti^J H^Jl, except 
 the third radical be Vorn, as nnS nVJD root VDJ n£)> 
 The future in kal terminates in (-), except the root 7^3 ; 
 1 is retained, as 73,^ /l^ri &c.: the formatives in huphal 
 have (•.,) instead of 1 on account of dagesh. 
 
 Thirdly. — The root 11(57 is reg., in the pret. and pres. 
 of kal, in the impcr. fut. infin. 7 is omitted, they ter- 
 minate in (-), as n[5 n}5* ; the infin. adds n__, as r)n|57 
 In the other conjugations some retain 7, as '^^lp^? Hj^^ril 
 **And Esther was taken," chap, ii, ver. 16; 'lissome- 
 times omitted in the light conjugations, as Genesis, ch. xii. 
 ver. 15, nj^ni " And she was taken," fut. huph. The 
 
 root Vrn to break, is found once defective, Job, ch. iv. 
 ver. 10," WJ DniDD ^it^^l " And the teeth of the young 
 lions were broken," for IW/J 
 
 T : • • 
 
 Fourthly.— The root t^'m he lifted up, and VO} he de- 
 parted, sometimes omit dagesh, as 1^0*1 and INJt^n ; the 
 same dagesh is often omitted from Hpb, as ^lilp^l. 
 
 Fifthly. — Verbs defective in J, some of the persons in 
 the preter of niph. and peengiel are the same ; such words 
 can only be distinguished from the sense, as Exodus, ch. iii.
 
 9A 
 
 the formatives ^nitst^n the first rad. is compen- 
 sated by double dagesh in the second rad. as ^^! 
 for ^i^.* third masc. future of kal. 
 
 ver. 22, DnSv^l '' And ye shall spoil Egypt," the third 
 masc. plural peengiel, where the dagesh in *:» shews the 
 dagesh conjugation, like DH'IS^I from '^^'1, 
 
 Sixthly. — Defective with * first rad. are such whose se- 
 cond rad. is V, as 1V» :iS'» V'^^ PV» DV* which lose % and 
 compensation is made by dagesh, like those with i, as 
 nilV^? f^nVil : these two tiy f^p^ sometimes follow the 
 
 same rule, as 0^3*1 i^7 Psalm cv. ver. 14, and in Leviticus, 
 
 chapter xix. verse 17, IDpfl ^7 ; these two ID^ I'i^ are 
 found twice defective in * . 
 
 Seventhly. — Defective in first and third rad. are such as 
 have Jin both first and third rad. as *rii he gave or placed, 
 and is thus declined, viz. in the pret. of kal the first and 
 second pers. sing, and plur. the last i is omitted, compen- 
 sated by double dagesh in the pronoun D thus, DH^ riflJ 
 ^nnj, plur. Dnnp ]nni l^ni; in the future the fir'sti is 
 omitted, as \r)\ for ]r)^\ the imper- is ]r\ ; the infin. both 
 3 are omitted, and n is added, as DT) Hriv to give, with 
 afl&xes *nn my giving, &c. 
 
 Eighthly. — ^Defective in the second rad. are — I. those 
 whose second and third rad. are the same, as HHD (sec 
 observation on the same) ; — 2. those with i second rad. as 
 ^]i^^ he was angry, whence comes f]^? anger, and with the 
 affixes ^Q^C 1D^? ; dagesh in B compensates for i second rad. 
 Ninthly. — Defective in the third rad. are those whose 
 third rad. is J or H, which are omitted before the personal 
 pronouns 1i and D, as VPi'D for HrTlS root JT^S, and ISH^ 
 for i:ini root tnj " " 
 
 : — T • - T *
 
 95 
 
 Rule 64. — Of a verb whose second and third 
 radicals are the same ; as, ^^D he encompassed. 
 
 Hith-poa-ngiel. 
 
 nnnpn 
 ni/npn 
 
 nnnpn 
 nnhob 
 
 Hupbngal. 
 
 npv 
 
 Hiph ngil. 
 
 riDD 
 •• I" 
 
 Pu-ngai. 
 
 22b 
 
 22D\ 
 22D 
 
 22bD 
 
 Pee ngieL I Niph ngsU. 
 
 nnbj np; 
 anbj :ipn 
 
 nib 
 anb 
 
 Preter. 
 Imperative. 
 Future. 
 Infinitive. 
 Participle A. 
 Participle P. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 jFirst. — Verbs in the form of the above table are called 
 DvlDp doubling, i. e. the second rad. being doubled; as, 
 
 mp he bowed, Dnil &c. which are usually declined thus : 
 in the preter of the light conjugations one of the two let- 
 ters and the preceding vowel (t) are cut off, as above, and 
 before the alfix pronoun compensation is made by double 
 dagesh in the remaining letter, as 1130 130 113011 &c.; 
 the formatives take a long vowel, as 310^ 3lDJ , except 
 some in the fut. which retain their regular vowels, as 'T^p^C. 
 Secondly. — In the preter of the light conjugations 1 is 
 inserted in the first and second pers. sing, and plur. before 
 the affixes, thus, DBD ^H Qp^ &c. 
 
 Thirdly. — \^ is inserted before the affix flJ, as HJ^SOn 
 third pers. fem. sing, future peengiel. 
 
 Fourthly. — The dagesh conjugation retains the second 
 radical, as 220 33b 33/^pn, except root T?P in the 
 future of peengiel, one 7 is omitted, and "] is changed to 
 (••), as 7pjji1 ^\l^l 5 T conversive to the future of kal 
 changes T to short (t), as Dll^l like Di5^*1 and in hiph. (.)is 
 changed to (,.), as 7^^*] like DpH ; the roots *113 and 110 
 retain (t ) in the preter of kal, as 13 1113 10 IllO to com- 
 pensate for dagesh in 1 ; these two Dll 7iy are the same 
 as 001 and ^7^ , like Dip and 33t5 ; and are by some 
 considered quiescent, and by others defective. 
 
 Fifthly. — The root 7711 the, characteristic H of hiph. 
 takes (-:) instead of (.), as ill^nn nn{< Deuteronomy, 
 chap. iii. ver. 24 ; the rest follow the verb 330
 
 96 
 
 (1) CONVERSIVE, 
 
 Rule 65. — "^ prefixed to a verb in the preter 
 changes Its sense to the future ; as, *^?^f he said, 
 ^P^] and he shall or will say, except the same 
 be preceded by another verb in the preter, as 
 Psalm cxlviii. ver. 5, ''^^l^^? J^JV ^''•^ " He com- 
 manded, and they were created:" the 1 joined 
 to the second verb is conjunctive only.* 
 
 * In the explanation of the above rule, as described 
 by grammarians in general, there appears a defect in 
 grammar, from whence arise two powerful arguments, 
 viz. — First, on the transposition of the two tenses, for 
 which ilo reason has ever been assigned, an observation 
 which seldom escapes the learner^s notice, who, con- 
 formably to this sacred study, expresses a desire to know 
 the cause of such change. — Second, on the division of 
 time, the imperfect and pluperfect of the preter, as also 
 the first and second future, which in all languages are dis- 
 tinguished by the help of auxiliary verbs ; none of these 
 terms are found in the Hebrew, nor has any substitute 
 ever been described by grammarians to supply their defi- 
 ciency. From these principles the author is induced to 
 present the following observations, in order to shew, that 
 the Hebrew grammar surpasses those of all other lan- 
 guages, and that all disputations in opposition thereto 
 originate either from neglect or imperfections of the tran- 
 scriber, as will appear from the following remarks on the 
 rule of 1 conversive, whose principal use (the reader will 
 find) is to point out the division of time in both tenses 
 much more intelligibly than from the comprehension of 
 auxiliary verbs, except the signification of 1, which when
 
 97 
 
 Rule 66. — "^ prefixed to a verb in the future 
 with (-), and dagesh in the formative, changes 
 its sense to the preter ; as, '^^^^ he shall or will 
 say, ""'^^^'2 and he said ; before the formative f^ 
 the T takes (-), as ]^^} and I gave ; if with any 
 other vowel "^ is conjunctive only, as ''^^?")^!' •^?7i^ 
 " I will go and see him," Genesis, chap. xlvi. 
 ver. I. 
 
 prefixed to the preter retains its poArer of conjunctive 
 (and), but when to the future it is adverbial (then). The 
 difference between the two words according to grammar is 
 this — the adverb alludes to some prior cause ; but the con- 
 junctive (and) only joins words in one sentence, as will 
 appear from the following observations. 
 
 The root in the Hebrew being the third masculine sin- 
 gular (as stated in rule 46) is invariably the preterpluper- 
 fect, which will be shewn from the root H^n he or it was, 
 whence all Hebrew roots are regulated (see observation 
 page SO, also observation on H* pages 10, 11, 12) where 
 the reader will find that the root ITH alludes emblemati- 
 
 T T 
 
 cally to the Deity, -whose existence is indeterminate ; it is 
 therefore evident that the above verb is the preterpluper- 
 fect ; the imperfect of the same verb the reader will find 
 clearly expressed by 1 conveisive to the future ; as Gene- 
 sis, chap. i. ver. 3, "And God said, let there be light, 
 ■^ih? *n^1 and there was light," instantly, without inter- 
 mission of time : the same distinction of time will be ob- 
 served respecting the future, viz. the first future is the ori- 
 ginal, made by the formativcs (the letters *n't»?) to the root, 
 expressing the object to be done intensely, without any 
 interposition of time, as, ibid, "And God said, "li>? ^r?* 
 
 N
 
 98 
 
 Rule 67. — ^ conversiveto the future to verbs 
 quiescent in ^ third radical causes ^ to be omit- 
 ted ; as, '^EUor r^'m::^ root n?^V he made. 
 
 let there be light,"* immediately. The second future is 
 comprehended from the power of 1 conversive to the 
 preter ; as, Genesis, chapter i. verses 14, 13, Vni " And 
 they shall be (speaking of the two groat lights) for 
 signs and seasons," &c.; which will be found useful here- 
 after : such are the terms of the second future. The 
 same distinction the reader will find, by due attention to 
 the root, throu<rhout the whole bible ; as, N'^3 and K*li*1 
 
 " ■'tt t;- — 
 
 both signify the same — he created ; the former, which is 
 the root, is the pre erpluperfect ; as such it is understood 
 in the first chapter of the bible : " In the beginning N12 
 D^n?^ God created the elements," that is, the composi- 
 tion of the whole universe, which afterwards became in 
 existence; but {^"11*1 verse 27, is the imperfect, '*thus 
 created he man," who did not exist till he received the 
 breath of life ; the word K*^2*1 is therefore evidently the 
 preterimperfect : the same will be observed in the root 
 "IDK and "IDK*"! both signify he said ; the first is the plu- 
 perfect, as Genesis, ch. xxxii. v. 5, ^py^ ^l^V "1D{J ^3 
 " Thus said thy servant Jacob," (when he sent them) ; but 
 IDK^I " Then said he," is always the pretcrirapertect ; as 
 such it is understood in the first chapter of Genesis, where 
 it is with 1 conversive, as NT],Nnpn, fi5^Vn,D'nW inn&c. 
 each alluding to some prior cause, comprehended from the 
 sense of the sentence ; the same the reader will find in 
 Leviticus, chapter xxiii. verse 3, D^) ID^JI *r)i|5in:|l D^} 
 ~-. — ^_ — ■ — — — ■ ' 
 
 * Tliis mode of expression is by some grammarians considered the impera- 
 tive, also the first future — to (.•ommeiice immediately, and in some instances 
 to continue without limit.
 
 * 99 
 
 Rule 68. — The adverb ^If? not yet, and the 
 participle ^^ then, coining before a vei b in the 
 future, changes its sense to the preter; as, 
 Exodus, chap. xv. ver. 1, HOT W^ ?K "Then 
 Moses sang," *^?1; ^^ *' Then spake Joshua," 
 verses 10, 12, ^DV^ D"JD " Did not yet sprout," 
 Genesis, chap. ii. ver. 5. 
 
 n^m Dnyn Dpp^j ^rin^i dhIn on'pv} r\wr\ »n-ip 
 
 *' If ye walk in my statutes, and keep my command- 
 ments and do them, then will I give you rain in its due 
 
 season, and the earih shall yield her increase," &c. 
 
 The reader will observe the verbs ID*?^ ye shall walk, and 
 ir\f2ti^r\ ye shall keep, being the first future, are unlimited, 
 i. e. ye shall always keep them ; but the other verbs, viz. 
 DD^tS^VI and do them, '>r\nl^ then will I give, and H^nJI 
 
 • — :— '•— t: ^ ' t:t; 
 
 then shall the earth produce; these verbs are originally 
 in the preter, and are made future by 1 conversive ; are 
 therefore considered as the second future, relating to some 
 priority : many more instances might be produced ; how- 
 ever those above stated, the author trusts, will prove 
 sufficient to substantiate the above rule.
 
 lUO 
 
 THE DIVISION OF THE ALPHABET INTO RADICALS 
 AND SERVILES. 
 
 Rule 69. — The twenty-two letters of the 
 alphabet are divided into — 
 
 Eleven radicals p'l j^ J/tJl *^£D HD ^"""ing ^Ji* >'00t of a word ; 
 
 Eleven serviles ^^^^^ Hti^iD TD^N shtwii g ihe various parts of speech.* 
 
 Serviles may become radicals in such words as 
 are composed of servile letters only ; as, ^l*^ he 
 was, ^?^? he eat ; they are only called serviles 
 when they serve to shew number, person, and 
 gender; also to constitute the inseparable pro- 
 nouns, or to supply the place of adverbs, pre- 
 positions, conjunctions, kc. 
 
 * The Hebrew language (as noiiccd in rule 23) has but 
 two parls of speech — a noun and a verb ; the rest are 
 supplied by letieis from whence they receive iheir ap- 
 pellation of serviles, for the reason already given. The 
 author's remarks relative to their power when joined io 
 verbs are as follow : — First, that from the addition of five 
 servile letters to the root of a verb transitive are formed 
 seven conjugations, forty-six moods and tenses; and with 
 the addition of five more of the servile letters are expres- 
 sed the different persons, number, and gender in ail the 
 conjugations (see general table of verbs), where the reader 
 will find 235 distinct words modified from the root ; and by 
 adding the personal pronouns, as noticed in the table of 
 affixes, to the root, the number of words d. duced from ihe 
 first conjugation are 221, which make a total of 456 ; and 
 if these personal affixes are joined to peengiel and hiphil, 
 as the rest do not admit of personal affixes, there will ap- 
 pear no less than 1368 distinctive words derived from the 
 root ; the whole of which the reader will find at one 
 view in the general table for the declension of verbs, 
 invented by the author: this may be considered as an 
 additional proof of the power and beauty of the language, 
 as also the necessity of the vowel points.
 
 101 
 
 Rule 70. — Servile letters joined to verbs and 
 nouns, thus : — 
 
 These six '^tS^nn ")are postfixedrto the pret. ^ in all the 
 Thet>e four HjV ?to i>hew nuin.^ to the imp. \ conjuga- 
 3pers. & gen.f^and future ) tioiis. 
 
 These four :n'i< ) 
 
 f are pre- 
 
 Th( se four dSd^ i ^"^"^^ 
 
 [ 
 
 to mark the difierent per- 
 sons in the future, 
 to the infin. occasionally. 
 
 These prefixes cause 
 a double dagcsh in 
 the surcfCiSii g letter 
 if capable (rule \0). 
 n is also interrogative 
 and adtiiirative; — it 
 take> (-: ). 
 
 These seven ^7^1 HJJ^'J* are prefixed to nouns 
 and adverbs, sigiiilying as follows :— 
 
 P Prepoaition — from, out of, &c.; takes 
 (.), before the letters "nj/linj^ (••) 
 D is also the characteristic of the 
 participle or the hemantiv, distin- 
 guished by the vowels and da- 
 gesh (lule 1\.) 
 
 ^ Relative — who, >yhich, that ; takes 
 
 n Demonstrative, vocative, emphatic — 
 the, &c ; takes (-). 
 
 • The above seven prefixes are derived from distinct words — both have the 
 same meaniig; the difference betvtcen'the affix and the distinct word is in 
 quantity or quality of the object to which they are joined, thus: — 
 
 J3 from iP a preposition ; l>oth signify from, as Genesis, chapter ii. verse 17, 
 ^^1!!? V.V'?'' " ^"' ^''"™ ^''*-' tree," i. e. the smallest portion ; 
 but, ibid, chap. iii. ver. 12, " And she gave me, \ Vm jO from 
 the tree," &c. meanii g a great part. , j 
 
 t|^ from '(^^^. the relative prononn, as Psalm cxlvi. ver. 5, -lpJ;._ ^^^ 
 '• That the God of Jacob." 
 
 n from \\} an adverb of interjection, pointing out the object, as Jl^JM 
 that house, W iy\ > that man. 
 ' from I ' a noun, signifyiiig a hook, used to join or disjoin tilings, as Exod. 
 chap, xxxviii. v. 28, D^IIDV? D'H HE^V " ^^ ^^^^ hooks 
 for the pillars," theonly word in the bible whose first rad. is *), and 
 is therefore considered a servile in the beginning of all other words 
 whence it is derived, namely to join and connect sentences ; as, 
 nriKI *^K land thou} or diyoin, as iDi^") V2i} his father 
 or his mother.
 
 102 
 
 1 Conjunctive or disjunctive — and, if, but, when ; take^ 
 (:), before a labial or another (:) it takes 1, before a 
 pause or monosyllable it has (r) 
 
 3 Similitude — as, so, like as. 
 7 Dative — to, into, about, &c. 
 
 3 Ablative — in, on, among. 
 
 These four t^I17}^ may be serviles in the beginning of a 
 word, otherwise they must be considered as radicals. 
 
 These tlirec,* whose original vowel 
 is (:), except before an accent or 
 monosyllable, when they take (■>■), 
 before (:) tliev take (.), before * 
 
 the letters ^^^T take (.), and (:) 
 is omitted, as ^H^T for <n>") &c. 
 
 3 from j3 an adverb of similitude — like, as, so; and if 3 is prefixed to two 
 nonns in construction, each expresses similitude : as, '11)33 ^3 
 ny^QD " Thon art like Pharoah, and Pharoab like thee." 
 
 7 from y^ adverb — to, towards, into, near. 
 
 JJ from 1^ preposition — in or on, between; as, ^2 '" "'fj *i*3 between me, 
 '1^31 *"*' between tbee. 
 
 • The prefixes JJ 7 3» ^'jose original vowel is (:) shevpa, admit of 
 the following exceptions:— 1st, before a monosyllable, an accent, or the 
 demonstrative prononn, also before the infinitive f^ with two (w) or two 
 (-)they take (r ), as njn3 HtS llVh n3ti^7 &<•.; 2d, before a 
 
 T " T V T — - T V V T J 
 
 compound vowel it takes Ihe same uncompoundfd, as ^"^f^S *llDJ^7 *llDK3 
 3d, before the word ^J^f^ my Lord, or the letters nYil^ "'th the same 
 vowels; the prefixes ^^^^^ «ake (-), as »J^^e^ »Ji^^"; ''}'^^^ nih'l 
 tbc last is read ^ni^l » '"'* before the woid Q^H /^C God, or the letters 
 
 j^")j-j» with tlie same vowels •__ the prefixes have (•• ), as D^H/NS^c. 
 
 If these attributes are prefixed by the letters HtJ^D ^^^y 'etain their \owels, 
 as ]'\li^D mn^ti^ D^nSjStn ; 5tu, before a period they have (-), as Q^Q^ 
 6th, the letters 3*73 pi'ffixed 10 i.ouns with f^ emphatic, or the characteristic 
 of nijih. hiph. and huph. usually cause n to be omitted, and take its vowel, as 
 riJ<31 D*Dt5^3 ^w"" \"^^<^3^ D^St2^n3 •" ^^e heavens and in the 
 earth ; the article (the) is understood from the vowel (-) instead of (:). 
 
 Note. — The learner i$ recommended to copy the above seven serviles, and to lay 
 them b^ore him in his first attempt to translate the Hebrew into English, as it tvill 
 greatly assist him in pointing out the radicals from the serviles; the meaning of the 
 latter he will find before him, and for that qf the root he must rqfer to the Lexicon.
 
 103 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 THE DIVISION OF NOUNS. 
 
 Rule 7 1 . — There are four kinds of Nouns, 
 the radical, the infinitive, the participle, and 
 the hemantiv, except a few which are primitive. 
 
 Rule 72. — Radical nouns are such as ?'e 
 composed of the same radical letters as the verb, 
 which is the root of all words, both regular and 
 irregular.* 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 * Regular nouns may be derived fromkal, peengiel, orpu- 
 ngal, distinguished from the verb by the change of vowels ; 
 thus, "^Sp a king, root '^Ji2 he reigned, l^QTJ a desire, root 
 \pn he delighted, t2^1p holy, root ti^"lp he made holy; 
 those which are in the form of peengiel and pungal retain 
 the same vowels, as /"^H a mast, D^^D a ladder ; all such 
 nouns are regular, containing the three radical letters of 
 the root from whence they are derived : some radical 
 nouns are defective, derived from irregular verbs, and 
 therefore lose some of their radical letters in the following 
 manner, viz. 
 
 1. Defective nouns in first rad. '> ; as, mj^ an assembly, 
 nifj^ a counsel, r.nj^^ he appointed, and l^y he counselled. 
 
 2. Defective inthe second rad. T or * ; as, *^J a stranger, 
 r.llJ to sojourn, '|^7a scorner, r. ^17 to scorn, 711 strength, 
 ]yt the e^^e, from Vh y^; also tliose defective in J, as 
 ^H anger, r. ^i^? he was angry, r\^ thou, from ri!lK H^n 
 
 r.'oin.
 
 104 
 
 Rule 73. — The infinitive noun is the infinitive 
 mood — the name of" the action (see rule 53J ; as, 
 ^nj great, r. ^li he magnified ; also nouns end- 
 ing in n with (•••••) or (--), as nnip a seat, riVl 
 knowledge, r. y^l 5^"!^ ; the root ^^i he lifted up, 
 whence comes the infinitive kal ^^*^ exaltation, 
 forgiveness ; those ending in Hi and n\ as ^"^'^D. 
 middle, ^117.3 captivity, are derived from verbs 
 n"b m, roots Hi^n nSj frule 60; ; those which 
 have "i or T in the place of the second rad. as "'"Ji^ 
 light, ^^^ good, root the same, (seeobs. 4 on rule 
 58j except pn a statue or law, from p\i^. 
 
 Rule 74. — The participle noun, so called 
 from its quality in being both noun and verb ; 
 as, "^'r^'^one man who is watching, also a watch- 
 man, 1??^^ darkness, r. 1^^ he hid or darkened, 
 
 *^^^?. a teacher, r. peengiel "^^7 ; some are de- 
 rived from irregular verbs, as ^} '^1] a fugitive 
 and a wanderer, roots ^^^ and '^'^^. 
 
 3, Defective in the third rad. H as l^? or *Ilt^ a father, 
 r. n^X he was AviUin"r, VD, a son, from tl^'2 he built : 
 some are regular, as Hiti^ a year, from Hi^ he repeated, 
 &c.; n is sometimes changed to ^ consonant, as '\'^V meek, 
 r. XW he afflicted. 
 
 T • 
 
 4. Some nouns double the first and second rad.; as 7^7^ 
 
 or . Sj a heap, r. SSj and iSs'pD'I r. Sl3 and SSs ; all 
 stich nouns are considered as radical nouns.
 
 105 
 
 Rule 75. — The hemantiv noun ; that is, such 
 nouns as are made from verbs by adding one or 
 more of the letters VDiQJ^n to the root ; as, 
 n^oSri a desciple, r. "^P^, ^^^P judgment, r. 
 £30?^ he judged. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 The letters Vn^Df^H are added to the root in the fol- 
 lowing manner : — }C in the beginning, as ^pi;^ a liar, from 
 iDhe told lies ; the D both in the beginning or end, as 
 "tlD*7n a scholar, D*^tDV a crown, r. "TD7, 10^ ; H gene- 
 tally at the end to form nouns fern, as PlpTif justice, r. 
 pyi ; i2 in the beginning, asDipD a place, r. Dip ; J is 
 commonly at the end, as ]rhp a table, r. Tlb^ he sent 
 forth ; * in the beginning to form nouns proper, as pr\'^] 
 r- pn*^ ; '^y^^^\ from V/P*f and W God heard, in the 
 middle to form adjectives, as "inhf mighty, 1''^^ rich, r, 
 "TT^J *lt£^J^ and at the end of a word to form numeral ot 
 
 — T — T 
 
 national adjectives, as HifD an Egyptian, r. *nVp he 
 oppressed, HDi a stranger, H^V an Ebrew, ^Hp second, 
 ^pyp third, &c.; 1 is always a vowel at tlie end of a word, 
 as ^12^1 strong, r. 1^^ he prevailed, mD'7P a kingdom, r. 
 ■^^D ; in nouns feminine 1 or 1 is put before the last syl- 
 lable, as rhr^y nmaji &c. 
 
 From these observations relative to the division of iiouns 
 the learner may easily discover the state of the one before 
 him — whether regular, quiescent, or defective, a radical, 
 infinitiv.', participle, or hemantiv noun : with regard to 
 the other circumstances of a noun, viz. number, gender, 
 absolute or in construction, simple or with affixes, (which 
 has already been noticed in the rules of etymology) as also 
 the power of the servile letters, the only thing loft is the 
 rule of finding the root ; but previous to this, something 
 more must be observed about the verb.
 
 10t» 
 
 Rule 76. — There are several more distinct 
 verbs in the bible, besides those stated in rules 
 50 and 51 ; these are called double irregular, 
 the number of which, together with those 
 already noticed, is twenty-seven — the same 
 number as the letters in the alphabet, including 
 the five finals : an example of each the learner 
 will find in rule 82. 
 
 Rule 7 7. — Verbs having a two-fold irregu- 
 larity are varied according to each of them, viz. 
 the root ^X he celebrated, in hiph. third plur. 
 pret. l"Jln, fut. nV, like :^^l and nS^i, the root 
 no^ he inclined, infin. hiph. HniLDnS, Numbers, 
 chap. xxii. ver. 3, like ^21 and 5^?^ 
 
 Rule 78. — Words composed of more than 
 three radicals the reader will find in the Lexicon 
 at the end of every letter, distinguished thus : — 
 
 1. Dvp^^P From the power of doubling ; i. e. two out of 
 
 the three radical letters are double, to com- 
 pcnsate for the defect of the third ; as, 7^7Jl 
 ^1?X ^rom hhy nnn and SsSd npjlj5 r Jots 
 
 SisS'^jP &c. 
 
 2. D^VBlip From the form of four ; i. e. such words as 
 
 have four different radicals ; as, /HS iron, 
 ntt^nil brass, DH^lD paradise. 
 
 3. D^K^pinp From the form of five ; i. c. such as have 
 
 ' five different letters ; as, V"l"jDV frog, nDySj 
 burning, or trembling : most words of this 
 form are nouns, except a few, as tti^'^9 " He 
 spread," Job, chap. xxvi. W^SSV" 1 will 
 nourish ye," Genesis, ch.xlv. v. 11, r. 7^'3,
 
 107 
 
 Rule 79. — Sometimes an ' undeclinable part 
 of speech is the root, and accordingly inserted 
 in the Lexicon without the vowel point, to shew 
 that the same has no meaning, but is placed as 
 the root for several other words which are de- 
 rived from it, such as verbs, nouns, adverbs, 
 prepositions, particles, Sec; as^^^ time, root 
 nm ; S^ all, r. '^^^ ; r)^ with, r. nnK ; Di^ a 
 mother, r. D»^e; ;iK thou, r. nJ^? fcc.; D^^r hiph. 
 D»32^n he rose up.f^fly, ^"1:3 niph. ^^J^^ he sepa- 
 rated. 
 
 OV,' 
 
 !l 
 
 Rule 80. — Sometimes the noun, or some 
 other part of speech, is put as the root in the 
 Lexicon, from whence are formed verbs in al- 
 most every conjugation, excepting kal ; as, 0^7 
 
 food, niph. QD^^ he fought ; "l?1 a word, pee- 
 ngiel "^Sl he spoke ; V^^ seven, niph. ^2B^3 he 
 swore ; T^^ before, hiph. "^^^n he declared, Sec. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 The several divisions of verbs are described by the 
 letters /VD . this word (as noticed in rule 44) grammarians 
 have made use of, — 1st, for an example of a verb; 2dly, 
 to form the different conjugations ; Sdly, as a guide for the 
 distinction of the several kinds of verbs, by way of con- 
 traction, whence all the roots in. the language are exem-
 
 lOB 
 
 Rule SI. — Adverbs, prepositions, and other 
 [)iirticles of monosyllables, sorae of which are 
 
 primitives, may be simple, as D^ also, ^^ not, 
 »^> then, ^poi; or compound, as l^ns within, 
 rn^ without ; and with the affixes, as *^ in me, 
 1^ in thee, ^k}^ in them, the same with the rest 
 of the pronouns. 
 
 piified; thus, the root 1f2t^ ; the tt^ is termed '^VDIT'D 
 
 Yh'y first rad.; the 12 bv^ri'V the second radical ; the n 
 
 *^>'!)n"^ the third Tad.; and with the addition of the two 
 words, viz. ♦TO quiescent, and HDn defective, are all 
 
 the ir re fibular verbs notified : as, HU^Ms termed *"£) ^TO 
 ijiiiescent in first rad. > ; Dlp,T'J^ *ni quiescent in second 
 
 Xiid, ^; ^^VD,^?"S ♦m quiescent in third radical K; T\^} 
 n'b VI quiescent in third rad. H; tt^Ji i"£) *"lpn defec- 
 tive in first rad i • DID the term of DvIDD i. e. doubling, 
 as^ill appear in the following table.
 
 109 
 
 Rule 82. — The several divisions of verbs. 
 
 n"S — 
 
 i"£) npn 
 
 ' ''' S"b — ~ 
 
 yh 
 
 nnvpn 
 
 D*>£)Op 
 
 Perfect, i. c. all such vorhs as retain their 
 
 - three radical letters thruiighotit all 
 
 the coDJiigalioits, as 
 
 Quiescent, i.e. such as have one or more 
 of the letters ^THl^ '" '''^ '''^*' "* 
 which there are twelve, viz. 
 
 Quiescent in 1st raH. }^ as 
 
 istrad. » as 
 
 2d rad. *1 as . . . . ' 
 2d rad. * as . . . .• . 
 Sdirad. J<f as . . . . . 
 
 3d. rad. H ^^ 
 
 Istrad. ^ & 3d rad. p| as 
 istrad. » & 3d rad. ^ as 
 istrad. S & 3d rad. {«( as 
 Sdrad. ^ & 3d rad. H, »* 
 2d rad. j^ ^ 3d rad. ,1 as 
 2d rad. T & 3d rad. ^ as 
 
 Defective. 
 
 Defective in istrad. J a^ 
 
 Istrad. ^ as 
 
 ■ 2d rad, 
 
 3d rad. 
 
 ^ as 
 J as 
 
 istrad. ^ &Quies.3dr. {^ 
 
 istrad.^ &Quies.3dr. H 
 
 — both ends 1st and 3d rad. ^ 
 
 " 3d rad. J^ as . . . . '. 
 
 Such as double the 2d rad. as . . . . 
 Defective 1st rad. J and doubling the 2d 
 Quiescent 1st i;ad, ^ and doubling the 2d 
 Such whose 1st and 2d rad. are the same . 
 Such as have foor radicals, as ... . 
 Such as have five radicals, as ... . 
 
 
 T T 
 
 rvf\ 
 
 T T 
 
 T T 
 
 nnD 
 
 nib 
 
 "n:i 
 
 S9
 
 no 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 TO FIND THE ROOT OF A VERB. 
 
 Rule 83. — After the servile letters arc no- 
 ticed, the remainder must be the root, the 
 meaning of which will be found in the Lexicon, 
 where the root of every word is first placed 
 in alphabetical order, and then the words de- 
 irived from it: if there are three letters, the 
 root may be regular ; as, ^"^'^P) and they shall 
 observe, ) conjunctive and conversive, ^ the 
 pronoun of the third person plur. preter, root 
 "^D^ ; or irregular, as ^^''^^ and do them, root 
 ^^y he did; ^ third radical is changed to '. 
 See rule 60, observation I . 
 ' I ' ' 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. — ^'T. 
 
 1. Words of twa letters with a loi^ vowel, place ♦ or 
 
 ^ between, as \7 from \r? to scorn, |(!^ eye, r. ]*J^ ; but 
 rVjif with a short vowel, the word is defectirsfe', derived from 
 
 'a defective verb, as ^^ anger, r. *^^f, ^^^^ r. ^J^f V> 
 
 T; from 77J ; before a final addition, compensation is made 
 '^riiy double dagesh, as ''BH &c. 1 r 
 
 ■.'"'rr". ; • " ~ ' "■'' I cn, 
 
 2 If the prefixes hemantiv have a short vowel, and 
 dagesh in the succeeding letters, put ^ for the first tadical.
 
 Hi 
 
 Rule 84. — If two or only one letter remains, 
 the word is defeciive, derived from an irregular 
 verb ; and in order to find the root, place \ ^, 
 or ^ before, ^ or ^ between, or ^ at the end, or 
 double the second radical ; in either of these 
 cases the root will be found. 
 
 as npriD a gift, r. ]nJ he gave, or* as nn^D an offering, 
 r. ny ; and if the two remaining letters are Pip, place ^ 
 before it, as nj5{»? I will take, or n|57 he took. 
 
 3. After the servile letters are noticed, if there remain 
 but one, it must be considered as the second cadical ; put 
 n for the third radical ; and if 1 or 1 precede the second, 
 place * for the first, (by rule 56J as *lp1D instruction, 
 r. ID* 2U/^D a seat, r. ^55^* ; otherwise the first radical 
 is i, which in general is compensated by double dagesh 
 after the formatives, (see rule 63) as lO*] r. HDJ "^^l r. 
 HDJ ; and if the root is not found in the letter J, place ♦ 
 
 for its first radical, as Ifljpn X? Leviticus, chapter xix. 
 verse 27, r. P]j^ being one of the nine verbs defective in ♦ 
 
 (rule 62, observation 6) or ^ by the preceding rule. 
 
 are 
 
 Note. — Words consisting of many letters, as D**TVl/D /I ^wo only 
 radicals, namely J^ and 1, the rest are serviles; thns, ^ conjngation (and), 7 
 dative (to or for), JQ hemantiv, "^ asubstitnte for*, r. ^yfl he appointed, 
 
 •" T 
 
 whence comes a noun hemantiv, IJ/lD ^" appointed time or season, plural 
 
 D^^yiD seasons.
 
 112 
 
 OF ADVERBS. 
 
 KuLE 85. — Adverbs make no sense alone, either as 
 verbs or nouns; they have no tense, declension, num- 
 ber, or gender, but arc highly useful by their junction 
 with Ihe above : twenty-seven adverbs nre excepted, which 
 do admit of declension ; those wilha * decline like nouns 
 plural, the rest like nouns singular, viz. 
 
 • ^™ 
 
 After. 
 
 T^'ii 
 
 Where. 
 
 V^ 
 
 Not. 
 
 • ^i< 
 
 Unto. 
 
 
 End. 
 By. 
 
 
 With. 
 Because. 
 
 vi 
 
 Between. 
 
 r ^y^^ 
 
 Besides. 
 
 !. ;^r»^n 
 
 Except. 
 
 ^inv'n 
 
 For the sake. 
 
 njn ir} 
 
 Behold. 
 
 'nSi't 
 
 Except. 
 
 IDS 
 
 As. 
 
 
 Alone. 
 Therefore. 
 Opposite. 
 Before. 
 
 '"i^ 
 
 From. 
 
 "^^i^- 
 
 Against. 
 
 HDi'i 
 
 Over against. 
 
 
 Round about. 
 Upon, 
 
 . niir 
 
 Yet. 
 
 oy 
 
 With. 
 
 • nnn 
 
 Under. 
 
 nn.K 
 
 Afti r me. 
 
 ^i'k 
 
 Wlierc art thou. 
 
 "^m 
 
 ^'"i^ 
 
 Not you. 
 To him. 
 
 vik 
 
 The ends. 
 
 
 By tliee. 
 With them. 
 
 ^^S^u 
 
 On my account. 
 
 vi-»2 
 
 Between me. 
 
 
 Besides thee. 
 
 Only thee. 
 
 On her account. 
 
 
 Behold us. 
 Except me. 
 
 
 Like us. 
 Thou alone. 
 On my account. 
 
 ♦nbiv^ 
 
 Opposite me. 
 
 T.^?i^ 
 
 Before thee. 
 
 upb 
 
 From tis. 
 
 ■i"!^;! 
 
 Against him. 
 
 lni)i 
 
 Over against him 
 
 
 Round-about me 
 Upon us. 
 
 'in'ij^ 
 
 While, as yet. 
 
 ^:by 
 
 Willi us. 
 
 r\^mn 
 
 Instead of thee. 
 
 These three, V^ not, Tiy yet, and HiH behold, instead of the pronoun 
 i take i|3 as JijiJt^ ^^^Tiy liiH.
 
 113 
 
 The following adverbs are undeclinable. 
 
 
 ►How. 
 
 Snrely. 
 
 >Not.* 
 
 >Biit. 
 
 fBecanse. 
 
 '•Where. 
 
 v0hv 
 ^']^ 
 
 Dvp 
 
 pirn 
 
 nnr 
 
 nins) 
 
 Never. 
 I pray. 
 
 Now. 
 
 Lest. 
 Little. 
 
 There. 
 Between. 
 Three. 
 Something. 
 
 r Yesterday. 
 
 Three days past 
 
 To-morrow. 
 
 Last night. 
 
 Above. 
 
 Below. 
 
 Far off. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Once. 
 
 Twite. 
 
 More. 
 
 Less. 
 
 Four times. 
 
 
 Even 80. 
 Who, which. 
 I wish. 
 
 nnt^ n^^ 
 
 Woe. 
 
 nn HHK 
 
 Sorrow. 
 
 nini* 
 
 Behind. 
 
 
 Before. 
 Without. 
 
 DJts^n 
 
 On account of 
 
 ns nrn 
 
 Here. 
 
 n 
 
 Enough' 
 This Com. 
 
 ir nr 
 
 This M. 
 
 DKT nr I This F. 
 
 D^cO 
 
 Not yet. 
 
 K^^ 
 
 Is. 
 
 in* 
 
 I'ogether. 
 
 »3 
 
 For, &c. 
 
 HDD 
 
 So. 
 
 How much. 
 1 
 If not. 
 
 Theiefore. 
 
 Why wherefore 
 
 ^p np na 
 
 [what. 
 
 • The adverb y^ not, is used to the fiitnre only, as l7at^ri ^H >'* 
 shall not eat ; 5^7 is used to both, as ^]^*^3 5^ /I **"<* ^ \ia\e not consumed, 
 "^DJ^n ^7^ ^*'"" ^^^^^ "*** *^y '> ^"^ rt^ "*>> ^^ "sc<* o^'y l>efore nonns, as 
 t5^*K t*J^ "" "'^"» n{*?'i"^ ya "^ °"^ seeing : there are several more 
 
 adverbs, which the reader will find in the Lexicon. 
 
 f 
 
 t For the different vowels nnder the JJ interrogative, see obsenatiom on 
 rule 33. 
 
 P
 
 UJ 
 
 AFFIXES TO VERBS. 
 
 Rule 86. — Verbs take the same affixes as 
 nouns singular, signifying the agent or patient, 
 viz. 
 
 TABLE. 
 
 T in. in^in.'ii^. "i 
 ■ m ri n 
 
 tit:- t 
 
 i: li ii 
 
 D D D 
 
 Ayent. 
 I. 
 
 Patient. 
 Me. , 
 
 1 Com. 
 
 Thon. 
 
 Thee. 
 
 2 Mas. 
 
 Thou. 
 
 Thee. 
 
 2 Fem. 
 
 He. 
 
 Him. 
 
 3 Mas. 
 
 She. 
 
 Her. 
 
 3 Fem. 
 
 We. 
 
 Us. 
 
 1 Com. 
 
 Ye. 
 
 You. 
 
 2 Mas. 
 
 Ye. 
 
 You. 
 
 2 Fem. 
 
 They. 
 
 Them. 
 
 3 Mas. 
 
 Tbey. 
 
 Them. 
 
 3 Fem. 
 
 II 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. An affix to a verb signifies the patient, that is, the 
 person or thing acted upon ; as, '^072^ he has sent me, 
 iTpS he visited him, with the same vowels as marked in 
 the table. 
 
 2. The pronoun of the first person to a verb is ♦J to dis- 
 tinguish it from the noun, which has ♦ only, except the 
 infinitive ; as, Hptt^S in my watching, that is, when 1 
 watched (see rule 53) ; except also the participle, both 
 active and passive ; from their being considered as adjec- 
 tives (see rule 55 J j they admit of the same affixes; as, 
 npB my visitors, linpC^ our watchmen, &c.
 
 115 
 
 3. The adverbs '^J? to, unto, 7V upon, DV with, are 
 sometimes understood ; as, H^nni I gave it (to) her, 
 lil^l^n it shall come (upon) him, V"1^")J* ^^ evil shall 
 not dwell (with) thee. 
 
 4. The personal pronoun H^ of the third fem. pret. is 
 changed to D before the affix ; as, ^Jnii^S she visited me. 
 
 5. In the future of the dagesh conjugation i is some- 
 times inserted before the affix ; as, inj^DD* 'iniDDl"\K 
 See observations on rule 10. 
 
 6. An affix to a verb changes the first vowel when (r) to 
 (:) ; as, IhSk^ pret. kal, r. H^t^ ; TjO^fii^^ future hiph. r. 
 Dlti^ ; in the imper. and infin. of kal the first vowel (:) is 
 changed to (t), as '^"^Dtt^ guard me, and 1i"ip7 teach us; 
 except (:) under the formatives in the dagesh conjugations, 
 which does not chancre on account of the affix, as ^3"^^* 
 lie shall bless thee, ^"IpK^H and guard thee, &c. 
 
 7. 1 the pronoun plural before the affix is sometimes 
 changed to (...) ; as, Htl^^S Genesis, chap. iv. ver. 28, 
 " Thou shalt subdue it," imper. of kal, r. B^^3 imper. 
 C'l^S subdue thou, mas. sing. 1{t^I13 subdue ye, mas. plu. 
 n the pronoun fem. third pers. sing, (her, or it), (...) 
 kibbuts, being placed here instead of ^ shooruk, on account 
 of the affix pronoun H her, or it.
 
 lltl 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Rule 87. — This part of" grammar teaches the 
 construction of words in tlie same sentence, 
 either simple or compound, with regard to 
 number, gender, person, 8cc.; as also the in- 
 fluence of one part of speech over another, in 
 directing its moods, tenses, kc. as will appear 
 by the following observations. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The agreement of a verb and noun; as, Genesis, 
 chap, xxxii. ver. 5, ^pr ^W ^DK HiD '' Thus said thy 
 
 servant Jacob," *ri*l)3il iTltJ^ " Sarah, my mistress ;" 
 except nouns signifying power, dominion, particularly the 
 several attributes of the Deity, which in general arc of the 
 plural, and are often joined to nouns and verbs singular ; 
 
 as, Ex(^dus, chapter xxi. verse 4, T^m "i^ ]r\] ''*J"i"^N; DK 
 ^*' If his master [Hebrew masters! gave him a wife ;" 
 again, Genesis, chapter xlii. verse 30, piJH WN: tt^^KH 
 " The man the lord [Hebrew lords] of the" land ;'' mn» 
 D^nS^n Kin " Jehovah— he is Elohim," I. Kings, chap, 
 xviii. verse 39 ; again, Genesis, chapter i. verse 1, 
 
 D^rtSx ^^"J.:l nW^n " in the beginning, God [he] 
 created." 
 
 2. The adjective generally agrees with its substantive 
 in number and gender ; as, 0311 2^^N a wise man, D^K^JK 
 DVJ^n wise men, HD* HK^K a fair woman : and in verbs, 
 
 . T -: ' T|T T • '
 
 117 
 
 as "l^in nnN tUou shalt speak, DnUll DDK ye who arc 
 speaking ; the same with regard to the pronouns, as HD/ti^ 
 'in " My son Solomon IJnK DH D^dSiT hSkH D'COl^n 
 those men are in peace with us," Genesis, chap, xxxiii. 
 ver. 21 ; except a noun plural signifying power, dominion, 
 which is often joined to an adjective singular, as Isaiah, 
 chap. xix. vor. 4, ntt^|5 D'illK Tl *' In the hands of a 
 cruel lord [Hebrew lords];" i.e. you shall be under the 
 yoke of many masters, where each of them shall deal 
 with you cruelly : the construction of such sentences must 
 be rendered distributively, as Psalm xix. verse 9, *p5ti^Q 
 npt^ "H " The judgments (plur.) of the Lord is iirue," 
 (sing.) meaning every one of thy judgments is right and 
 true. 
 
 3. Two substantives of different genders governed by a 
 verb, participle, or an adjective : — each of the latter will 
 agree with the masculine gender ; as, Genesis, chap, iii. 
 verse 5, ^nJr^<'l D■^^?n ^?3^nn "And he hid himselves, 
 Adam and his wife7'"D*^^1n 'WKI nliDT Judges, chap, 
 xiii. ver. 19, " Manoach and his wife seeing," participle 
 mas. plur.; again, D'Jpt 7^1ti^^ D^*)l^f " Abraham and 
 Sarah were old," plur. mas. 
 
 4. Except in such instances where some excellency or 
 dignity is observed in the feminine gender ; as, Genesis, 
 chap, xxiii. ver. 14, n^ll^^H H^m *' And it shall come to 
 
 * T-:— — T T : 
 
 pass," instead of nn^HI; again. Judges, chap. v. ver. 1, 
 pnni n")1n"T n^ni "And she sung, Deborah and Baruk;" 
 here the verb masculine being joined to the noun feminine 
 to shew some eminence on the part of the woman : some- 
 times this mode of construction is to point out a kind of base 
 or mean action in. the masculine gender, as DHp inin^ 
 nti^Dn pi^) " And she spake, Miriam, and Aaron dgainst 
 Moses ;" again, Ezekiel, ch. xxiii, v. 14, H^Jfln ^n^fiS^V 
 third feminine, for DJl'^V masculine, " Ye have acted 
 abominably."
 
 11» 
 
 5. A verb plural in construction with a noun singular, 
 or a verb singular to a noun plural, are often rendered dis- 
 tributively ; as, Psalm cxix. verse 103, ^yvh IvSd^ HD 
 ^inilpK " How sweet (pliir.) are thy word (sing.),*' i- e. 
 every word ; again, Genesis, chapter xviii. verse 20, 
 ninS *3 DnKOni "And their sins (plur.) is heavy (sing.)" 
 for 1"T^3, are heavy, meaning each of their sins. 
 
 6. In reading Hebrew with an English translation, the 
 reader will observe a great difference with regard to the 
 arrangements of the Hebrew words; as, Genesis, chap. ii. 
 verse 19, lOt^ Jii^r] H^H 0D^ DIKH lS }^"lp» 'l^^i^ VD^ ; 
 here the word /D) a noun collective, all or every, belongs 
 to the noun H^n ^D) i. e. "And every living animal, "\tt^K 
 DlN^n 1^ i»?np; to whom Adam shall give names, 1D^ Niri 
 shall be (or is) its name »" 
 
 7. An adjective plural in construction with several 
 nouns of different number shall belong to the one in oppo- 
 sition ; as, Genesis, chapter iv. verse 10, ^j^PfK *D"7 ^1p 
 npij^n \0 ^Sn^ D^fpyV;; " The voice (sing.) of thy bro- 
 ther's bloods (plur.) are crying (participle) to me from the 
 ground ;" the adjective plural D^pVlV crying, agrees with 
 the substantive zip the voice (sing.).* 
 
 8. An infinitive before a verb shews the certainty of the 
 object ; as, DIDn ry^D " Dying, thou shalt (surely) die," 
 *?r)l<n ^ Jl^ " Eating, thou mayest (freely) eat ;" also 
 with n admirative, as i<i2i N"i^L! Genesis, chap, xxxvii. 
 ver. 10, " If coming, we shall come," i. c. shall we cer* 
 tainly come ? but an infinitive after a verb shews the con- 
 tinuation of the thing, as Genesis, chapter iv. verse 6, 
 
 * But according to the interpretation of the commentator Yarcbi — who says 
 (ttal the reason for using the participle pinral (bloods) h to shew, that he who 
 feinmiis muiA'r dentroyA thoHsatid^,— the noun voice is here distrihntively, 
 ). e. the wire of <"ach.
 
 119 
 
 n^'p n»P»n oh " if thou doest good (continually) thou 
 shalt be forgiven," Dl5K^ D2t2^*2 " And always making 
 laws," Genesis, chap. xix. ver. 9". 
 
 9. An infinitive before a noun has often the sense of a 
 verb in almost every mood and tense ; as, I. Chronicles, 
 
 chap, xliii. ver. 9, Sk^J^^^S iSp ^Sp ^JdS " Before the 
 reigning of a king," i.e. before a king did reign in Israel;" 
 the infinitive is used here as the preter ; *^^yn Dijt ^j^H 
 Joshua, chap. vi. ver. 3, " Encompassing the city;" here 
 it is used as the preter, for 1D*j5n ye shall surround ; '^I'^H 
 yiDpl going and moving, signifying the continuation of 
 going — here it expresses the present tense ; sometimes 
 it is used for the imperative, as Dl^H DV DH llDT "Re- 
 member the day of Sabbath," &c.; and with the letters 
 D^D ^ — with i or 3 it is always the preter, as 11pD2 or 
 "Tlpp3 when, or as he was visiting ^hem, and with 7 it has 
 the sense of the future, as n^H};?? to love ^^?*)*^1 and to 
 fear, i. e. ye shall always love and fear the Lord, and with 
 D it is always negative, as 11D*7P f"""™ learning, i. e. that 
 I should not learn. 
 
 10. The verb substantive 15^* and H^ll am, is, was, &c, 
 are often omitted, and must therefore be filled up from the 
 sense of the text, as Genesis, chap. i. ver. 2, 7^ "^^^^ 
 Dlnri *^E) " And darkness (was) upon the face of ihe deep," 
 y\D 'D "that (it was) good," Genesis, chapter i. ver. 4, 
 r\r\H b^nS.N n^'m " Thou (art) a mighty prince." 
 
 11. Repetitions, pleonisms, and ellipses, are often met 
 with — almost in every verse ; these are figures of speech 
 peculiar to the Hebrew language, whereby many mysteries 
 are discovered.
 
 120 
 ADDITIONAL OR PARAGOGIC LETTERS/ 
 
 Rule 88. — These two n and ] final, and some- 
 times \ are often added at the end of a verb: 
 thus, ^ to the second masculine singular of the 
 preter and imperative, also to the first mascu- 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 First, ou the above letlers, being the only three selected 
 from the twenty-seven ; — Second, by their manner of being 
 joined as above, and to no other word ; — Third, from their 
 appointed station, viz. H to the singular, and ] to the 
 plural : these are contemplations peculiar to that divine 
 study usually called the bible, + except by the Hebrews, 
 by whom it is denominated n*^in Law, from root Hl^ he 
 
 •' T ' TT 
 
 cast or direct, whence comes the noun hemantiv n^ln 
 
 * After the exposition of a Hebrew word witii regctrd to the luoi, tlic power 
 of the servile letters, &e. according to the several rules of grammar, if theri- 
 should be a letter unnoted, such must be considered a paragogic letter. 
 
 t It seems that this is the general tcim in almost cvt?ry tongue by which ihf 
 Holy Scriptures are denominated : the derivation of this word can only be 
 
 deduced from the Hebrew, Genesis, ch. xi. v. 9, ^^^ H/lSti^ Kip P /V 
 
 ^3 Babel ;" a word signifying; 
 
 V T 
 
 confused, mixed, &c.; because the Lord did there confound their language 
 into differeut dialects from tlie original in which this sacred volume was first 
 written : the translation thereof in otiier languages is justly denominated 
 
 bible, from ^13 
 
 V T •
 
 121 
 
 line singular and plural of the future ; the ] to 
 the third plural common preter and third mas- 
 culine plural future. Grammarians treat of 
 these two additional letters only as emphatical 
 
 *' The law of God delivered by Moses," Deuter. ch. iv. 
 verse 44, iT^inn Di*??") " This is the law which Moses set 
 before Israel, (o instruct them," &c. 
 
 The perfection of this divine volume above all other 
 writings is perceptible in every chapter, verse, &c.; it is 
 neither defective nor redundant, see Deuter. chapter xii. 
 
 verse 32, 1iD» ^mJD xSl vhv ID^DiD ^h '' Thou shalt 
 
 ' V • : : • : T T 
 
 not add upon it, nor diminish from it :" the same is ob- 
 served in Psalm xix. the first six verses of which allude to 
 the creation : those who comprehend the following three 
 verses of the first chapter of the bible, viz. *liN ^"l* " Let 
 there be light;" V^p"! ^H* " Let there be an expanse;" 
 nlliKp ^n^ "Let there be luminaries;" will know the 
 meaning of the above verses in the Psalms: the next three 
 verses, viz. 7, 8, 9, are allusions to the laws of God, sta- 
 tutes, &c. being the object of the creation ; Jeremiah, 
 chapter xxxiii. verse 28, DOV ^nnn xS D^e "H nD^< ?b 
 
 ^np^ ^b p?J O'M nipin nS^Sl "Thus saith the Lord, 
 were it not for my covenant (being performed) day and 
 night,* 1 should not have appointed the order of the hea- 
 ven and earth ; such is the conclusion drawn from the con- 
 nexion of the above Psalms, beginning with the principles 
 
 • The same allusion the reader will find in Psalra i. ver. 2, namely — 
 
 T ; T T T -!•:::• r :| : v — : — ; • . 
 
 his delight is iu the law of the Lord, and in his law doth he meditate day and 
 Bight." 
 
 Q
 
 122 
 
 signs ; but the author's remark on this rule (as 
 alluded to in the introduction) is to shew that 
 the addition of" a letter in this sacred volume 
 
 of the creation, stated in the first six verses, whose exist- 
 ence is dependant on the following three verses, viz. 
 m'Dr\ "n nnin " The law of God is perfect ;" "H nHV 
 
 " The testimony, "H HIpQ the precepts, "H niVp t'lc 
 commandments, "H fiN"!* the fear, "H ^pSlt^p the judg- 
 ments," &c. These are the bases upon which the law is 
 established : nothing can be added, unless it is for some 
 great purpose, — either to point out some of the mystical 
 parts of scripture, (with which the Hebrew abounds) or to 
 indicate some defect of grammar rule ; the latter of which 
 will be found the very cause of these observations on 
 the paragogic letters. The composition of the word ]7} 
 or Hiin an interjeciion (behold) is often used in the Hebrew 
 as a note of observation, directing the reader to take notice 
 ofsomething to be understood, as Genesis, ch. xxiv. v. 8, 
 ^♦Sn i:)i'(i^n ^^{^^9 -Itbt^ ^p? ^n " Behold the silver we 
 found," &c.; whence <he addition of any of the letters H 
 or^ to a word retain the same power, pointing at something, 
 the n being joined to the imperative and future to express 
 desire, permission, also the power and possibility of the 
 action ; these terms, in ( iher languages comprehend! d by 
 the sign of the potential mood, are in the Hebrew known 
 by the addition of H being one of the letters H* emble- 
 matic of the Deity,* (see observation 4t) from whom alone 
 
 • The same is romprehendccl from ttie additional ♦, which is often found at 
 the end of the participle, and to infinitives having the sense of the participle, 
 
 a«psaimc»iv.andcxv. »*p")n ♦o^pD ^ii^^^ihS ^Swoh *n»n:JDn 
 
 OSnn *<^- allnding to ^ jud being the first emblem of the Deity, as noticed 
 in pages 8, 9, &c.
 
 123 
 
 is of" a far greater import than that of making a 
 word merely emphatical, as will appear from 
 the observations thereon. 
 
 every wish and possibility can be exp(!c!ed ; thus the 
 
 reader will find, first, from llie imperative ^7 and HD? 
 bo'.h signifyins^ go, H^ and r\np_ take, 2W and H^^tS^ re- 
 turn ; the addition of H to the same word changes the im- 
 perative to the potential mood ; the same is observed in 
 tbefulure, Jl^^tt^KI HI; b?!^ with H paragogic signifies *" I 
 will go (with your permission), and return (if it please 
 God,)" Exodus, chap. iv. ver. 18; but "]b^ (H no: being 
 added) shews- absolute inclination, Genesis, chap. xxiv. 
 ver. 58, " I will go (even witliou< your leave)," and i^ili'K 
 Genesis, chap, xviii. ver. 10, the angel said to Abraham, 
 " J shall (certainly) return ;" the same distinction the 
 reader will observe throughout the whole bible. The ? 
 final is added to the second and third person plural to par- 
 ticulate individuals, as pVpt^'H Deuteronomy, chapter vi. 
 ver. 13, " If (each of) you shall attend to my command- 
 ments;" but '^VD*pr\ DeutcroMomy, chapter xi. verse 13, 
 without I signifies, " If yc (i. e. the greatest part of you) 
 «hall attend ;" the same in Exodus, chapter iii. verse 21, 
 
 DPn ^:hn «S loSn ^3 n^m " And it shall come to pass, 
 pD7D ^? if (*11 of yo") shall gOi (for none shall be left) 
 0*7]^ ^b ye shall not go empty," i. e. the generality of 
 you will not go empty, those that will have opportunity to 
 ask of their neighbours silver vessels. Sec, such will be the 
 signification in all words of the same form. This, 1 trust, 
 will be found sufficient to establish the above remarks on 
 the paragogic letters ] '' H, including T being one of the 
 letters \l^^\\ and is found four times added to nouns, from 
 the same reason of being emblematically like those of H*.
 
 124 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 
 
 Rule 89. — The art of versifying so often met 
 with in poetical scripture, Psalms, fcc. surpasses 
 that of every oiher language,* attributed to the 
 rules of orthography, viz. I . the fixed sound of 
 each vowel ; 2. the mode of forming syllables, 
 (being the rudiments of poetry) wherein it ex- 
 cels all other languages : the succession of sound 
 and number of feet are equally the same in the 
 Hebrew ; the terms bv which these forms are 
 expressed are as follow: — 1. I^J^I^^ tenoo-ngoh, 
 a vowel, from 'i^'^ to move, including all mono- 
 syllables composed of one vowel only, either 
 with one consonant, as ? boa, ^ gie, &:c.; or with 
 two, as ^5 bom, '^^. gier, Sec: 2."^^! ye-thed, a 
 nail or hook,+ used to join or link together, in- 
 cluding such monosyllables as are composed of 
 more than one consonant and one vowel, as ^J? 
 be-nee, ^nj) ge-dowl. In Hebrew poetry each 
 verse consists of two equal parts ; the first is 
 called ri7l a door or opening, meaning the first 
 part of the sentence ; the last is called ^"^^ the 
 shutting up, i. e. the end of the line or verse: 
 these are the terms used in Hebrew, viz. such a 
 number of iTiVliri i. e. vovvels, and riiin^ hooks, 
 
 • Vide Addison's Spectator, No. 40j. 
 
 t If the vowel be preceded by (:) or compound vowels it is termed a nail, 
 botb forming one syllable or foot.
 
 12o 
 
 of which each line is composed: an equal num- 
 ber will be found in every line throughout the 
 whole chapter or Psalm, according to the first : 
 some are composed differently from others with 
 regard to metre. The following is an example 
 of a prayer written in verse, each line contain- 
 ing twelve syllables or feet, distinguished by a 
 comma, the words are separated by a hyphen (-); 
 the literal translation, according to the original 
 meaning of the word, is placed over the Hebrew. 
 
 T : : viv : •.•(•.•; ^ : •.•■.•• t : 
 
 Tliu degree of metre this song is conii)Osed of, viz. four nails, and two vowels to each nail in every line throughout 
 
 the wliole poem, 
 
 were created formation every before reijrned who (of) the universe the Lord 
 
 T , ; . . . T V 1 V ; ' T 7 T V — ; 1 T i ' ™; 
 
 was proclaimed his name a king then all by his will was made at the time 
 
 T V; • : ' v 5|v ; ? : v ; t ? ; — •• ; 
 
 tremendous shall reign he alone . , of all the vanishing and after 
 
 in glory will be and he is and he was and he 
 
 T » T » ; • : •.•»:!• V ? ; T ) T . 
 
 to be joined , to compare to him , second and no is one and he 
 
 and the dominion is the strength and to him ending witbont begiuning without 
 
 n"! ,tpP ,n) -?i:? n "iSt : n^S pn 'hi -n^t^ ,{<'i -'Sa 
 
 (of ) trouble in the time of my support ami the rock my Redeemer and living (is) my God and he 
 1 shall call in the day of my cup the portion to me and refuge my banner and he (is) 
 
 xn ,j5K -Dvn -*p ,13 -n:j2 : p "dIj ,pi -»p /^ -Nim 
 
 and when I awake I sleep in the time my spirit do I commit in his hand 
 
 n-i y ,J*i ~p ,^K -nv3 ; : ^n ,n -i^pQ j^ -in »3 
 
 I will fear and nod tome my lord and my body my spirit and with
 
 126 
 LESSON XL 
 
 THE SCHOLAR'S EXAMINATION. 
 
 Rule 90. — A collection of questions and an- 
 swers, including the heads of all the foregoing 
 rules of grammar, with several appropriate 
 remarks by the author. 
 
 1 Question. — How many letters does (he alphabet con- 
 sist of — the number and the power of each ? 
 
 Answer. — The alphabet consists of twenty-two letters, 
 five finals, total twenty-seven consonants ; their power is 
 comprehended from their respective names, i. e. the first 
 letter of the name is the power of the letter, as 7 lamed, 
 that of (1), \^ sin, that of (s), &c. 
 
 2 Q. — How are the letters divided ? 
 
 A. — First, accordinfif to the five organs or instruments 
 of speech (page \5) ; — Second, into nine units, nine tens, 
 and nine hundreds (rule 42J ; — Third, into eleven radicals 
 and eleven serviles (rule 69J. 
 
 3 Q — How many vowel points are there in the Hebrew ? 
 their power, &c.? 
 
 A. — According to the mode of reading adopted by the 
 PorfugucFC and Spanish Jews, the number of vowels (as 
 marked in the first table) is fourteen, viz. five long, five 
 short, one very short, and three compound ; but according 
 (o the Polish and German Jews (which was the original 
 mode of reading) (see observation on the vowels) the num- 
 ber of sounds, as described in the second table, arc seven 
 long vowels ; the first two, viz. chowlowm and tsierie, are
 
 127 
 
 always long, even without the attraction of 1 and % as VD 
 cowl, /H chiel, for ^13 7*11; the other five, viz. (t), (-) 
 (»)) (•)> (•••)> ^^^^ capable of being both long and short; 
 they are long when followed by the letters ^IHK, or when 
 they are accented ; otherwise they are short, making but 
 half a syllable, and must therefore be joined to the next 
 letter by (:) shevoa or dagesh, or in the last syllable of a 
 word, which always ends with a consonant, as DH^JH hig- 
 gash-tom, &c. 
 
 4 Q. — What is the general rule of f:) ? 
 
 A. — (:) before another vowel, either in the beginning 
 of a word or syllable, is termed pronounced (:), the letter 
 over it sounds rapidly to the succeeding one, which ends 
 the syllable, as *iil benee ; and in the middle of a word, 
 when preceded by an accent or melheg, as "^l/priT vethee 
 melowch (rule 12) ; otherwise (:) is quiescent by rules 4 
 and 5. 
 
 5 Q. — How is single dagesh distinguished from the 
 double ? 
 
 A. — Dagesh is single in the l)eginning of a word, or in 
 the middle after quiescent (:), which is in general found in 
 the letters JlDSIill to take away the aspirate (h) (rule 9) ; 
 but dagesh preceded by a short vowel, not accented, is 
 double — the letter sounds twice (rules 9 and lOj. 
 
 6 Q. — What is the use of double dagesh ? 
 
 A. — First, to compensate for the deficiency of a letter ; 
 second, to mark the dagesh conjugation, &c. See observa' 
 tions on rule 10. 
 
 7 Q. — What causes the change of vowels ? 
 
 A. — The increase of a word from its original state, as 
 explained by tVe several remarks stated in the observation 
 on rule 43, where the reader will find that in most cases the 
 first vowel is changed to (:), sometimes the second vowel, 
 to prevent an increase of the number of syllables.
 
 128 
 
 8 Q. — Of what use are the accents ? 
 
 A — Firs', to iu»rk the long vowel from the short, 
 whereby the similar vowels are distinguished ; secondly, to 
 point out the different pauses in a sentence (rule \9) ; 
 thirdly, to distinguish the various meaning of the same word 
 (see observation on rule ^0) ; fourthly, to assist the reader 
 by their quality of being euphonic — producing an agreeable 
 and harmonious sound, in which the text is read in public. 
 
 9 Q. — The Hebrew having but three parts of speech, 
 (rtile S3 j how are the rest (those used in other languages) 
 supplied ? 
 
 A. — The word DJi^ a name, comprises all ihings distin- 
 guished by name, either common or proper, the name of 
 the thing or quality ; hence it will appear, that in the 
 term noun is included the substantive, the adjective, and 
 the pronoun. The v6rb includes the participle. The other 
 parts are comprised in the word H^O an adverb, i. e. all 
 such words as are usually joined to both noun and verb, to 
 express the different meaning and various circumstances of 
 each, including conjunctions, prepositions, and interjec- 
 tions, which are represented two ways ; first, by distinct 
 words (rule Id) 'y second, by prefixes and postfixes, com- 
 posed of the servile letters (rule 72;, except the article 
 (a) or (an) which is always understood, as ^'^i^ a man, \'')J 
 an eye, &c. 
 
 10 Q. — How is the accusative case distinguished from 
 the preposition (with), since both are expressed by the 
 word n^^ or ^^j^. 
 
 A. — From the connexion of the words to which it is 
 joined. See observation on rule 30. 
 
 11 Q. — How is the radical noun distinguished from the 
 verb ? 
 
 A. — By the vowels ; if (-t) the word is a verb (rule 46^, 
 if with any other vowel the word is a noun.
 
 129 
 
 12 Q. — How are the diflFerent conjugations, moods, and 
 tenses distinguished ? 
 
 A.-^By the characteristic letters and the change of 
 vowels. See rule 48. 
 
 13 Q. — How are the different persons expressed in a 
 
 verb ? 
 
 A. — By the inseparable pronouns postfixed, (rule 49j 
 the same being derived from the separable. Rule 33. 
 
 14 Q. — How are the inseparable pronouns distinguished ? 
 
 A. — From the word or part of speech to which they are 
 joined, viz. if to nouns they are termed the possessive, 
 denoting the possession of the thing, as "'ri'S my house, 
 from n)5 ^ house ; if joined to verbs they signify the pa- 
 tient, &c. (see rule 33) except that the H from the sepa- 
 rable pronoun in the second person masculine and feminine, 
 singular and plural, remains the same when joined to a verb 
 in the preter, as PDJ^tl^ &c.; but to nouns it is changed 
 toD or *], as ^H^^ &c.; except also the pronoun of the 
 first person (*— ) I, me, my, which when joined to a verb 
 adds D, as THf^^ I watched, root "1^2^ 
 
 15 Q. — In verbs transitive it appears that the participle 
 passive of kal, the preter and participle of niphngal, all 
 allude to the same thing — receiving impression of the 
 agent — what is the distinctive quality of each ? 
 
 A. — The disproportion of time, comprehended from the 
 two kinds of participle, namely, the absolute and com- 
 pound ; thus, the participle passive of kal is compounded 
 of all the tenses, as Psalm v. verse 9, Dii*^-!! HinS l^p 
 "Their throat is niDS an open sepulchre," i. e. it has, is, 
 and will always be (open) ; again, Ecclesiasticus, chap. v. 
 ver. 13, InnS vSvnS "^^^'2^ ^^'\y " Riches is kept to 
 
 ■'tT;Tt:- TV r 
 
 the owner for his hurt," i. e. the same has, is, and will 
 
 R
 
 130 
 
 be l^uitl^ kept for his destruction ; but in niphngal the sig- 
 nification of these words is different, pointing to that very 
 time, as Genesis, chap. vii. v. 11, innS;) D WH n'n"^Kl 
 " And the windows of the heavens innp^ were opened," 
 i. e. at that very time the flood began, to increase the rain, 
 and no longer ; whence the difference between HinQ and 
 inniDi is evidently in time, the former being compounded 
 of all the three tenses, whereas the latter only comprises 
 the present and preter ; the participle in this conjugation 
 is always absolute, as II. Samuel, chapter xx. verse 10, 
 
 KTOn " But Arasa ^m^ xS was not on his guard," third 
 mas. sing. part, niphngal; ^KV ^*^n? (at that moment) of 
 the sword (which was in the hands of) Job ; whence it will 
 appear that IIDt^ the participle of kal, is compounded 
 of all the tenses comprehended from the text ; whereas 
 *1^t^J points to that very moment, neither before nor after : 
 the same distinction the reader will find throughout the 
 whole bible. 
 
 16 Q. — How are the various meanings of the servile 
 letter D, when used as a prefix, distinguished? 
 
 \, — From the vowel point and the dagesh ; thus D with 
 cheerik and dagcsh in the next letter, or with (. ) D be- 
 fore a guttural, denotes the preposition (from) &c. (rule 12) 
 if with any other vowel, or even with (.) if no dagesh fol- 
 lows, it is the sign of an hemantiv noun, as DlpO a place, 
 root D^p to rise, DStJ^p judgment, root DDt!^ he judged, 
 (rule 81 j otherwise it is the characteristic of the participle 
 of the last five conjugations, with the same vowels as 
 marked in the table of the different verbs. 
 
 17 Q._Words of four letters, as HDir^: hWd each 
 having D and H of the servile letters, how is the certainty 
 of the root discovered, since one of them must be consi- 
 dered as a radical ? 
 
 A. — By the experiment of declension, whence one of
 
 131 
 
 llie two must drop, either D or H thus, from "^K^D we find 
 T\20D HDt^D &c. n therefore must be a servile ; but from 
 
 T :| T T ; - T . . ' . 
 
 n^VD we only find T^bV HH^V &c. the D in H^Vp is 
 therefore evidently a servile, to make it a noun heraantiv, 
 as will appear in the Lexicon, under the root Twy ; this 
 will be found in every word of the above form, except TwVj^ 
 Leviticus, chap. v. f2 having (t), root 7J^D, 
 
 18 Q. — Words ending in D , by what rule is it known 
 whether D is original, or a substitute for H ? 
 
 A. — By the additional affix pronouns ; if D receives a 
 dagesh it is original, as from fTlKDr) Il'I'lK comes 1n"l1J^ 
 
 ?|nnj<pn ; but from Hmp iinsa^ we find iDTOp Hnnptj^' 
 
 n having no dagesh, shews that it is a substitute for H. 
 
 18 Q. — How are the letters 70 1 in the beginning of a 
 word known to be radicals or serviles ? 
 
 A. — Place n the definite article before it; if it makes 
 sense, the letters 2 /D are radicals, as D^iDDH the stars, 
 DnSn the bread, H/pHnn the cattle ; otherwise they are 
 serviles, and do not admit of H demonstrative or emphatic. 
 
 20 Q. — How is (t) in the beginning of a word before the 
 letters 1Vnn{<? known to be original, or to compensate for 
 dagesh in the above letters ? 
 
 A. — From the additional affixes, which by rule 43 change 
 (t) to (:) in such words only where (t) is original, as IH^ 
 nnni ; but whenCr) is to compensate for dagesh, as \*lKn 
 it is not changed to (:), as Hllk'lN'n &c. 
 
 21 Q. — Verbs of W *n^ quiescent in second radical 1 
 we find the third pers. mas. and fem. sing, both in the pre- 
 ter and participle of kal are the same ; how are they dis- 
 tinguished ? 
 
 A. — By the accent; thus, in the. preter the accent is 
 milngel, as from ^W to return, the preter of which is
 
 132 
 
 3tp be returned, H^tt^ she returned ; l)ut in the participle 
 these words are accented milrang, thus ^^ third masculine 
 nifit^ third feminine, &c. the same from 0^p to rise. Sec 
 table of the same. 
 
 22 Q. — How arc nouns feminine, original ending in H 
 as nJty TM^P riDCl^ &c. distinguished from those of the 
 
 T T T 't T T '-' 
 
 same form derived from verbs T'V ^Hi ; as from Dip IVa 
 VT\ come riDj5 mV nV"!^ n being the pronoun of the 
 third feminine (she) ? 
 
 A. — By the affixes or construction, viz. those which are 
 derived from verbs quiescent in the second radical T retain 
 
 the first vowel (r ), as iti^flrnnv, ;on-nn,D^P|5,T]»j;yna|5, 
 
 &c.; whereas in such nouns whose third rad. H is original 
 (like those named above) the first vowel (t ) is changed to 
 
 (:), as nlitf^ riDti^ rnvnii>p &c. 
 
 23 Q. — Nouns of monosyllables — by what rule is the 
 root discovered ? 
 
 A. — From their vowel points, viz. those with (••) are in 
 
 general derived from TV ^H^^ as IJj a stranger, ^7 a 
 
 scorner, r.- "11JI ^7, except]!! a son, r. HJS^ ]\y a tooth, 
 
 r. nitS^ ; those wi<h (-), as 7p a basket, ^J a heap, r. ^7J 
 
 vSD ; are verbs D v1£)3, except ^^ anger, DS a daughter, 
 derived from yy '")Dn r. P)^K H^S ; those whose vowel is 
 1 T or ^ are in general found the same in the Lexicon, as 
 
 *^i}»? to shine, also light, ^ID to be good, also good, 7*J 
 to rejoice, also joy, &c. except V1"l to do evil, comes JH 
 evil. Thus the learner will find that all nouns, or adverbs 
 of monosyllables, are either primitives or derived from ir- 
 regular verbs, and must be referred to in the Lexicon. 
 
 24 Q. — What is the learner's first consideration of a 
 word ? 
 
 A, — To know whether the same is a noun or a verb.
 
 133 
 
 23 Q. — How is this discovered ? 
 
 A. — Several ways; first, by the ending ; if the termination 
 be D\ \ J or Dl^ the word is a noun mas. or fern, plural ; 
 second, by the inseparable pronouns (see rules 33 andW) ; 
 third, by the prefixes, characteristics, &c. 
 
 26 Q. — How are the different conjugations, moods, and 
 tenses discovered ? 
 
 A. — The preter of all conjugations of regular verbs and 
 most of the irregular receive their sound, with the same 
 number of syllables, from the name given to each conjuga- 
 tion ; as, po-ngal, sho-mar, no-gash ; nigh-ngal, nil-mad, 
 nig-gash ; the same with the rest of the conjugations ; the 
 moods and tenses of each conjugation are discovered from 
 the characteristic letters and vowels appropriated to each ; 
 (see observations on the following table) where the learner 
 will find that by the addition of three vowels, viz. (.), (:), 
 and (-), are discovered all moods and tenses of the regular 
 and most of the irregular verbs in every conjugation.
 
 134 
 
 a-r* s. -o 
 
 S B--0 
 
 Si; t> -^ 
 "- — a 
 
 O (t — 
 
 =• =i4:-6J 
 
 i=- = = 
 
 
 '••nT- 
 
 It ~ 
 
 
 '£ H 
 
 n"" ~ 3 a, o a. x" 
 
 ?■ < 
 
 ^ «■ ** 
 
 "^ n n 
 
 !^» £• 
 
 t 3 ^ 
 12. O. (8 •' 
 
 < ^. n • 
 " '^ n 
 
 = E- E' 
 
 < 3 =r 
 
 ^ S " 
 
 — ?■ »> 
 
 s " 2. 
 
 < ^ =^ 
 
 c=; -► 
 
 ^ a. pj 
 
 lis 
 
 . r 7 
 
 - -• = J-g a; 
 
 * iS 
 
 «.. ■"< 3 S. 
 
 tr 2-' ^c, 
 
 •5' P 2.-*> 
 
 3 t" S 
 
 <XS "O 3 - 
 
 =; s cw tf 
 
 g- TO ^2 
 
 1 £■ 3-» 
 
 W 2 S! 3' 
 
 
 =■ 3 
 
 c-^ 
 
 3 « 
 
 n — 
 
 3 ^ 
 p ft 
 — . S 
 
 Qo 
 
 3" ^ 
 
 n o< 
 
 •^ 1: 
 
 c p 
 
 3- qs = 
 
 = o 
 
 S'3 
 
 w. 2, << < 
 
 ^ re '« 
 
 g c « E 
 
 _ o g- 3 iTi |. 
 
 p _►' n "E. IJiK 
 
 ^i I 3" D I 
 
 =. £. "^ s H~^ ;? 
 
 n »= ='3 _. 
 o "^ " -• ^ *= 
 
 o ? So5 HUn 
 
 —•3-3- :r.-R ,. 
 f: "= 3 ^^5• 
 
 (K 
 
 o> => 
 
 ? S- & 
 
 5 c 
 
 S -^ ££*•-!- 
 
 ^Z 
 
 
 S- — " 
 
 5^ 3 ^ 3 
 
 « a." o 
 
 ^ 3 ** CO 
 
 B 3 S "^ 
 
 5L 3 — ?r 
 
 -. 5. 
 
 i^II 5 
 
 O _ (iq3' S-'^*S 
 S' p^ sr » c o 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 
 
 ■« i- 1 
 
 
 ** , 
 
 1 
 
 
 t-* n 
 
 
 2'^ 
 
 ti 
 
 
 IP 1 
 
 
 
 n c 
 
 oS 
 
 .u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r- "^ 
 
 1 
 
 .E^ 
 
 •^i 
 
 
 
 
 3* S 
 
 _i. 
 
 __!_ 
 
 1 •■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a - 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 2 
 
 T 
 
 0| 
 
 2 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 1? 
 
 
 
 D 
 
 t 
 
 
 ^i 
 
 
 . 1 
 
 &. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 3- 
 
 1 
 
 
 •?^ 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 55 
 
 
 1 ? 
 
 
 
 -♦ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 35 
 
 • 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 ••^7 
 
 
 
 
 * <* 
 
 re 
 
 ^ 
 
 • 1 
 
 1 P 
 
 IK 
 
 > 
 
 o- 
 
 S 2. 
 
 :3 
 
 
 '7i 
 
 T C 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 * m 
 
 I 
 
 
 1 • 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ ^ 1 
 
 :; M M 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 1 § 
 
 
 :T| 
 
 
 = .1 
 
 : 
 
 ;•! 
 
 ;•! « 
 
 •'•ri 
 
 
 i 1 
 
 1I 
 .5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 .I 1 
 
 
 •: i 
 
 .' 1 
 
 
 •• 1 1 
 
 ^a 
 
 
 -ir 
 
 ;i 
 
 
 •*ll ?• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 ? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T '5 
 
 
 •• 1 
 
 ■ 1 
 
 • 1 
 
 •■ 1 
 
 .: - 
 
 
 •a 
 
 1 
 
 •; [ 
 
 1 
 
 r\^ 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 1 1 S 
 
 
 
 
 ..••I 
 
 ,: 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 ' .1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■!ti 
 
 ;•! 
 
 !.i 
 
 i-1 
 
 ;.| 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 • 
 
 ■5' 
 
 •u 
 
 
 -1 
 
 ^•\ 
 
 -1 
 
 1 1 ° 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 »^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 e. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 1 
 
 • 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 • 
 
 ■ 1 i 
 
 1. L 
 
 7 
 
 1_. 
 
 P 
 
 _i_ _„ 
 
 • L 
 
 .. 1 
 
 H 1 S 
 
 M 
 
 s 
 
 = 
 
 s 
 
 
 •• 
 
 
 s> 
 
 
 t; 
 
 re 
 
 
 j» 
 
 s_ 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 2' 
 
 Q. 
 
 
 S 
 
 i 
 
 re 
 
 •5] 
 
 •5J 
 
 <' 
 
 ' 
 
 '^^ 
 
 
 rt 
 
 fT 
 
 re 
 
 
 < 
 
 re 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3' 
 
 
 
 

 
 135 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 RULE 92.— THE LEARNER'S PREPARATIVE FIRST EXERCISE. 
 
 ■ '>m n^K3 D*p£!^*/tpi D^ipn DDriN* w^'p ^^Jn D^"t. c. iv. v. 6. 
 r\:2ti> D^j^n nr\^ ^m -rn^n n^pn p nitt^;i^S '>rhii '"n 
 D;Dn:^nT D^nppn Kin p on' w Dnn^K^i e. : nntr}> 
 
 ^W ^^"Tj ^'ij 'p p 7. : nrn Sn^n *i:in liny. D^n dv pn 
 : vSk n:l^^^|5 Son ^j»nW "pi? vS?< D»ninp D^'^'W 1^ 
 
 : D^n D3»ipS in"^ ^p:^ "it^s* nt<in nninn 
 
 TRANSLATION FROM THE OLD VERSION. 
 
 5. Behold, I have taught you statutes and judgments, 
 even as the Lord my God commanded me, that ye should 
 do so in the land whither ye go to possess it. 
 
 6. Keep, therefore, and do them ; for this is your wis- 
 dom and your understanding in the sight of the nations, 
 which shall hear all these statutes, and say, surely this 
 great nation is a wise and understanding people. 
 
 7. For what nation is there so great who hath God so 
 nigh unto them, as the Lord our God is in all things thafe 
 we call upon him for ? 
 
 8. And what nation is there so great that hath statutes 
 and judgments so righteous as all this law which I set 
 before you this day.
 
 136 
 
 THE EXPLICATION. 
 
 ni<?"l reieh — Verb, second mas. sing. imp. kal, 
 r. 7mi he saw, quiescent in third rad. H 
 like "n"? J ^ 
 
 T T * 
 
 ^JTl'lD'^ lira-mad-tee — Verb, first com. sing. prct. 
 pungal, r. 1p7 he learnt. 
 
 DDni;? eth-chera — Compound of HK accusative, 
 and Dip pron. second mas. plur. 
 
 D'pn chuk-kcem — Substan. mas. D* plur. from 
 sing, pn a statute, r. pJ^H he decreed, 
 a verb defective in one of the double 
 letters, like 220 
 
 W\DBpf2^ u-mish-poa-teera — Substantive plu. mas. 
 ending in D^ T conj. (and), takes shoorik 
 for (:) coming before a labial (rule 72), 
 D hemantiv, from the verb DDiJ^ he 
 judged. 
 
 "It^NS ca-asher — Compound of D similitude (as) 
 and Ipi^ relative pron. who, which, &c. 
 
 OV;^ tsiv-va-nee — Verb, third mas. sing. prct. 
 peengiel, r. HIV he commanded, (this 
 verb is never in kal) ^^ the pron. affix, 
 first pcrs. com. the patient, joined to 
 verbs (rule 99^. 
 
 nin* adonay — An attribute of the Deity, de- 
 noting Eternal Existence, (see page 11 
 Theology). 
 
 *n*?K c-low-hoy — Another attribute of God dc- 
 
 T v; 
 
 noting power, &c. with the affix pro- 
 noun possessive ( * ), the accent changes 
 
 (-)toCT)for(M. 
 
 See, behold 
 
 I taught 
 
 ye 
 
 statutes 
 
 andjudgments 
 
 according as 
 
 he command- 
 ed me, 
 
 the Lord 
 
 my God.
 
 137 
 
 niJt^Vl? la-nga-sowth— Infinitive kal, with the 7 
 to, r. njJ^y he made, &c. il is changed 
 to nl by rule 60. 
 
 *3 cien-T-Adverb of similitude, so, thus, r. 
 p3 he prepared. 
 JU'lj^S be-ke-rebh— Compound of 3 in, and^*!]!? 
 a substan. the midst, 
 
 '0^*7 ho-o-rcts — Substantive com., generally 
 agrees with the fern, gender H demon- 
 strative, the, takes (t) to compensate for 
 dagesh, by rule 11, r. \nK land, earth. 
 
 ^P^. a-sher — As before, which, pron. relative. 
 
 Or\^ at-tem — Pronoun second mas. plur. agent, 
 (je.) 
 
 D'JO bo-ecm — Part, active third mas. plur. r. 
 U13 double irregular, to come. 
 
 HDty sho-moh — Adverb of place, r. Dt2^ there. 
 
 T T * ' T 
 
 J nntt^n^ le-rish-toh— Infinitive kal, r. K^T he in- 
 herited, quiescent in first radical \ like 
 2^1^ n is added by rule 56, 7 to, and 
 n with mappik the pronoun of the third 
 fem. sing, her, or it, to agree with T^tj:^ 
 
 6.D^\'lDp^ ush-mar-tem— V. second mas. plur pret. 
 r. ^^^ he kept or preserved, 1 conjunc. 
 and conversive, takes shoorik for (:) by 
 rule 72, DJl pron. second mas. plur. (ye) 
 Dn^tJ^VT va-nga-see-them — V. second mas. plur. 
 pret. kal, r. T^^V he made, third radical 
 n is changed to * before the affix by rule 
 60, observation 1, ^ conjunctive and also 
 conversive, takes (-) instead of (:)on ac- 
 count of the compound vowel (-•• ) by 
 rule 8, Dn pron. 2d mas. plur. pret. kal. 
 s 
 
 to do 
 
 (coutinuall>) 
 
 in tlie midst 
 
 the land 
 
 (in) vrhicb 
 ye (are) 
 
 coming 
 
 tlierc 
 
 to inherit it. 
 
 And ye shall 
 keep (them) 
 
 and ye do 
 them 
 (continually)
 
 J 38 
 
 DDnDpn 
 
 
 'y^v^ 
 
 *!p cee— Conjunction, for. 
 Kin hee, for N^H — Pronoun, third ferain. 
 sing, she or it : * is changed to \ 
 
 choch-ma-the-chem — Substantive, fern . 
 sing. HDlDn wisdom, root DDPf he was 
 
 ^ T :| T ' — T 
 
 wise, Dp pron. mas. plur. possess, your, 
 u-bi-na-the-chem — Substantive, fem. sing., 
 
 ni*3 understanding, r. ]^3 to consider, 
 land : before a labialf:) is changed to 
 T D3 pron. mas. plur. possessive, your. 
 
 le-ngie-nie — Substantive plur. mas. in 
 construction ending in * r. ]*J/ an eye, 
 7 to, or for, iu. 
 
 D^^Vn ho-nga-mim — Substantive plural masc. 
 sing. Dy a people, r. DDV H the, (-) is 
 changed to (r ) (rule 1 i), 
 
 1t5^^^ a-sher — Relative pronoun, who or which. 
 
 pj^p^^ yesh-me-ngoon — Verb, third mas. plur. 
 kal, r. Vf2^ he heard, » the fut. 1 the 
 plur. mas. and \ paragogic, signify each 
 of them (rule 116;. 
 
 "SD'DK cth-col — DJ^ accusative, 73 a collective 
 noun : 1 is changed to (t ) before a hy- 
 phen. 
 
 D'ipnn ha-chukfkim — Substantive plural masc. 
 sing, ph a statute, r. p|5n he decreed : 
 dagcsh compensates for one of the double 
 letters (rule 64J, H the. 
 
 hSkH ho-ic-leh — Pronoun demonstrative plur. 
 
 V •• T 
 
 com. n emphatic. 
 11DX1 ve-om-roo — Verb, third plur. com. pret. 
 kal, 1 conjunctive and conversive [see 
 > obsercations on rule 65^. 
 
 for 
 it (is) 
 
 your wi&doiB 
 
 and joor un- 
 derstanding 
 
 in the eyes 
 the people 
 
 who 
 shall hear 
 
 all 
 
 the statutes 
 
 these 
 
 then shall they 
 say
 
 139 
 
 p"! rak — Adverb, undeclinable. 
 
 Dy ngam— As before, noun singular. 
 
 ODn cho-chom — Adjective, mas. singular. 
 
 P^il ve-no-bown — Substantive mas. r. |*!2 as 
 before, i heraantiv, "1 conjunctive. 
 
 *iiin hag-gow — Substantive common, a primi- 
 tive, n the emphatic. 
 
 7niin hag-go-dowl — Adjective mas. r. 7*1^1 he 
 magnified, H emphatic. 
 
 J ntn haz-zeh — Pronoun demonstrative, mas. 
 sing, n emphatic. 
 
 *D *3 (for) ^D a pronoun interrogative, who, or 
 where, (is there). 
 711 J ^^ gow godowl— a great nation. 
 17 Iti^Ka-sher, low— "ltf^^5 who, as before, 1^ 
 
 compounded of ^ to, and 1 pron. third 
 mas. sing, him, or (whom). 
 D^n*7^? e-low-him— God, as before. 
 D^Jll'^p ke-row-bim— Adverb plural, r. n^j^ he 
 approached. 
 V^i^ ie-loav— compound of 7^? to, and V the 
 pronoun him : takes (t) before the affix 
 (rule 96), 
 T^^T\''^ caedonai— As the Lord, IJ^ii/t;? our God, 
 as before. 
 7D3 be-chol— Compound of 3 preposition, in, 
 73 all, every, as before. 
 
 ^iK")n) kor-ie-noo — Verb, infin. kal, ^} the pro- 
 noun of the first person plur. (we) (our), 
 r. K"J|5 like i^'iD, 
 
 : vbi^ ie-lov— As before. 
 
 surely (a) 
 people 
 
 wise 
 
 & uDder&tand- 
 ing 
 
 that nation 
 that great 
 
 this 
 
 for where is 
 (there a) 
 
 great nation 
 to whom 
 
 Go<l (is) 
 
 to him 
 
 as the T.ord, 
 our God 
 
 in all or every 
 (place or 
 form) 
 
 of our calling 
 (i. e. when we 
 call) 
 
 to him
 
 140 
 
 na- 
 
 ^D^ u-me—And where is SiTJ ♦iJ a great ..„ 
 tion, I7 "IK^N to whom, as before, (are) 
 is understood. 
 
 D*j5n chuk-kim~Statutes D^Dp^DI and judg- 
 ments, as before. 
 
 ^^i?n^ tsa-di-kira— Adjective plur. mas. sing. 
 pnV a just man, r. pTV he was iust. 
 
 7D3 ce-chol— Compound of 3 as, according, 
 b'D all, as before, (x) for (1.), being in 
 construction. 
 
 n^inn hat-tow-roh— Substantive fern. sing. r. 
 jTI^ he taught, H emphatic. 
 
 ni^tn ha-zowth — Pronoun demonstrative sing, 
 fern, this, H emphatic. 
 
 Itt^K which, as before. 
 
 *3i^^ o-now-chee— Pronoun, first pers. com. 
 sing. I, |n1i participle, as before, r. ]n^ 
 he gave, or placed. 
 
 DD\!lp7 liph-nie-chem — Compounded of 7 to, and 
 ^Ip before, r. HiS he looked upon, D? 
 ■pronoun second mas. plur. ye. 
 
 * Ol*n ha-yowm— Substantive mas. sing. H em- 
 phatic, r. DV a day, a primitive. 
 
 and where (it 
 sndi) a great 
 nation, io 
 whom (are) 
 
 statutes and 
 judgments 
 
 just 
 
 according to 
 all. 
 
 this law, 
 
 which 
 I place 
 
 before ye 
 this day.
 
 141 
 
 SECOND EXERCISE. 
 
 :iiD n^m r^'m ^^ti'hTnn D*^tb^? K^n Genesis, ch. i. v. 39. 
 
 .... XT V — : T V ■ v; ,— 
 
 ; ^tt^^^^n Dv nj5i »nn nnjr ^n^i ij^p 
 
 — :(— T T : T : • v t t : • — r — ••.?!" 
 
 T T V — : ; •- : T • •- T • •■ —ri— • : — 
 
 TRANSLATION ACCORDING TO THE OLD VERSION. 
 
 Chap. I. v. 39. And God saw every thing that he had 
 made, and behold it was good ; and the evening and the 
 morning was the sixth day. 
 
 Chap. II. v. 1. Thus the heavens and the earth were 
 finished, and all the hosts of them. 
 
 2. And on the seventh day God ended the work which 
 he had made, and he rested on the seventh day from all 
 his work which he had made. 
 
 3. And God blessed the seventh day, and sanctified it ; 
 because that in it he had rested from all his work which 
 God created (and made) Hebrew, (toact).
 
 142 
 
 THE EXPLICATION. 
 
 KTI vay-jar— Verb, 1 conv. and conj. » fut. 
 third mas. sing, kal, r. ^^^'^ quiescent 
 in third rad. H, like 7X7^ ; ♦ takes (-) 
 for (.) bj observation on rule 60 ; third 
 rad. is cut ofF, by rule 60, observ. fifth. 
 D^rt/N; e-low-him — Substantive, an attribute of 
 Deity, denoting power. 
 
 "riK eth— Adverb, the whole. See rule 30. 
 73 col — A collective noun, signifying all, 
 every : 1 is changed to (t) on account of 
 hyphen (-) (see third observation on rule 
 4:3), (of) is understood. 
 
 '^P^. a-sher — Relative pronoun, who, which. 
 ntt^V ngo-soh — Verb, third mas. sing. pret. 
 kal, the root itself quiescent third rad. 
 
 n like nSj. 
 
 T T • 
 
 Tiyn'] ve-hin-naih — Adverb, behold, 1 conjunc. 
 and. 
 
 ^iD towbh — Adjective, mas. sing. 
 
 "lt?p me-owd — Adverb, of the comparative 
 degree, much, very. 
 
 *n*T vay-ye-hee-^Verb, 1 conv. and conj. ♦ 
 third, fut. mas. sin. kal, r. H^H quiescent 
 third rad. H, which is cut off on account 
 of T conversive ; the vowels are trans- 
 posed by rule 60, observation seven ; for 
 '^!'7!!!, dagesh in * is omitted, on account 
 of ♦ having (:). See observ. 8 on rule 10. 
 
 ^1.^. "ge-rebh— Substantive, mas. sing. r. I1*1V 
 he mixed. 
 
 And ii6 
 (ElohJm; 
 saw 
 
 (God) 
 
 the whole (of) 
 every thing 
 
 which 
 he made, 
 
 and behold 
 (it was) 
 
 I. very good^^ 
 
 and it wa^i 
 
 eveniDg,
 
 J 43 
 
 *n'2 va-ye»hee — As before. 
 
 "Hj^H bow-ker — Substantive, mas. sing. r. *1|5S 
 he searched, verb in pee-ngiel. 
 DV yowm — Substantive, mas. sing, a pri- 
 mitive word. 
 inX e-chod— Numeral noun, r. "IPI^ he united. 
 
 TV ' — X 
 
 C.ii.v.i^'^pp va-yechoo-loo — Verb, } conv. \fut. Ithe 
 
 third mas. plur. fut. pu-ngal, r. Tv?2 he 
 
 finished or ended. 
 
 D^^iS^n hash-sho-ma-yim — Substantive, mas. plu. 
 
 or dual, (see Lexicon, r. Dll^ or 71f2^ ) 
 
 ' T T X _ 
 
 an adverb, there, whence comes D'pK^ 
 heavens, n emphatic, the. 
 \**1J^m ve-hoa-o-re(s — Substantive, 1 conjunc. 11 
 emphatic, takes (x) for (-) to compensate 
 fordagesh, (rule \\y r. OK a primitive. 
 
 /Dl ve-chol — Noun collective, all or every, 
 T conj. 
 \ DK2^ tse-boa-om— Substantive, r. ^^^ a host, 
 
 X T ; ' r X ' 
 
 the affix D a pronoun of the third mas. 
 plur. them or their. 
 
 -• 73^1 va-ye-chal — Verb, } conv. and conjunc. ♦ 
 fut. third mas. sing. 
 D^n^K e-lo-him — Pee-ngiel, r. H^S as before. 
 D1*3 bay-yowm— Compound of 3 in, for HS 
 (set rule 75) DV subs, as before. 
 iy»21t£^n hash-she-be-ngee — Numeral adjective, 
 r. V^^ ^ numeral noun, H emphatic, * 
 hemantiv (rule 81^. 
 
 iDDK^p me-lach-tow— Noun fcm. hemantiv, made 
 
 "' by D and n, HDkSd with the affix 1 a 
 
 pronoun of the third person his, H is 
 
 changed to H (observation on rule 3A) 
 
 r. *]K^ undeclinable. 
 
 and it was 
 morning 
 
 day 
 
 thus were 
 finished 
 
 the lieaveo!: 
 
 and the earth 
 
 and all 
 
 the host 
 of them. 
 
 and Elohitn 
 finished 
 
 in the day 
 
 the seventh 
 
 his work
 
 144 
 
 *^IJ^N a-sher — Which, as before. 
 nlJ7y ngo-soh— Verb, he made, as before. 
 nl3^^*T vay-yish-bowth — Verb, 1 conv. and conj. 
 * fut. kal, third mas. sing. r. D^t^ he 
 rested. 
 DT*3 bay-yowra— On the day, as before. 
 *V*Il^n hash-she-bhe-ngee— Seventh, as before. 
 '^Sp niic-col— Compound of p from, and 73 
 / " all. 
 "inpK^p me-lach-tow— As before. 
 
 1p^, a-sher— Which, as before. 
 
 ♦* ntJ^V ngo-soh— He made, as before. 
 
 'Ili^i va-ye-bho-rech— Verb, 1 conv. and conj 
 » fut. pee-ngiel, r. 'T}^ ; (-) is changed 
 to (t ) to compensate for dagesh in H (r. 1 1 .> 
 
 D^rl7|!^ e-low-him— God, as before, 
 
 piii eth — Accusative, DV yowra, day. 
 ^VOtS^li hash-she-bhe-ngee— Seventh, as before. 
 tJ^p^l va-ye-kad-desh— Verb, } conv. and conj. 
 > fut. pee-ngiel, third mas. sing. r. t^*']\^ 
 he sanctified. 
 ^nit^ ow-thow — Pronoun accusative, him or it. 
 *3 cee— Conjunction, for. 
 "13 bow — Composed of 2 in, and "1 pronoun, it. 
 r\:iW sho-bhath— Verb, third mas. sing. pret. 
 
 kal, r. itself. 
 SsD mic-col— As before. 
 TJIpK^P rae-lach-tow— As before. 
 ' *lti^i< a-sher— Pronoun, as before. 
 J^SS bo-roa— Verb, third mas. sing. pret. kal, 
 
 TT 
 
 r. itself. , 
 
 Wthvi e-low-him— As before. 
 
 : nltt^vSla-nga-sowth— Infinitive kal, r. T^'fV he 
 '■ " made, with S the gerund (to) (rule 53;. 
 
 which 
 he madr, 
 and he rested 
 
 OD the day 
 seventh 
 from all 
 
 his work 
 which 
 
 he made 
 and God 
 blessed 
 
 the day 
 
 seventh, 
 
 and he sancti- 
 fied 
 
 it; 
 
 in it 
 
 he rested 
 
 from all 
 
 his work 
 which 
 God created 
 
 to do or to act.
 
 145 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE SECOND EXERCISE. 
 
 The author has chosen these last verses to shew the necessity of some 
 knowledge of the original, and that the translation of the bible cannot 
 always be depended upon, as will appear from the last word of this 
 lesson, viz. H 12^3^7 la-nga-sowth, a verb in the infinitive of kal, r. 
 n2^5^ he made,^ did, act, 7 being prefixed by rule 53, signifying (to),, 
 whence nitS^V/ to do, or to act, which is evidently proper, viz. that 
 which God created to act, i. e. to perform the office for the purpose for 
 which they were created : according to the translation the Hebrew ought 
 to have been HJiS^yT and made — the verb PlK^V he made, and T con- 
 
 T T : T T : 
 
 junctive.* 2d. In the last verse of the first chapter, and the first of the 
 second, run thus : — " And the evening and the morning were the sixth 
 day ;" thus the heavens and the earth were finished, and all the host of 
 them : whence it is understood, that the whole of the creation was 
 finished on the sixth day. The next verse of the second chapter evi- 
 dently proves that the whole was not completed — " And God finished 
 his work on the seventh day :'' this seeming contradiction the author 
 endeavours to explain in the following manner: — In rule II6 the 
 learner will find the remarks the author made on the additional letters so 
 often met with in this sacred volume, called nilH the law; wherein 
 
 T 
 
 nothing can be added nor diminished, much less can there appear any 
 contradiction ; see Psalm xix. \.7- If therefore any part of the bible 
 be found unintelligible, such must be imputed to the translator not being 
 fully conversant with the original. That every thing was finished on 
 the sixth day is evidently comprehended from the two verses — the last of 
 the first chapter, and the first of the second — " Thus (alluding to the 
 sixth day) every thing was finished ;" and that there was yet something 
 wanting to complete the whole is also manifested from the second verse — 
 " And God finished his work on the seventh day." This was no more 
 than the seventh day itself of the creation, requisite for the formation of 
 weeks, months, and years : this was not completed until the appearance 
 of the seventh day, when at the very moment of the appearance of 
 which the whole was completed. 
 
 *NoTE.— If the 3 of ^V'^llS^n DVn will admit of the adverb Q'^jlQ 
 (before) as it does in many places, as Exodus, chapter xii. verse 15 — 
 pti^N"in D V3 "IK " ^"' '^'^'^ heath, that ye put away the leaven before 
 the first day;" if so, the meaning of the text here might be rendered thus: 
 " And God finished his work before the seventh day." 
 
 T
 
 140 
 
 > 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 S 
 
 3 - 
 
 o r^ 
 
 l5^ .-ti 
 
 O 
 
 Hit- 
 
 r 
 
 Ph - 
 
 Q r 
 
 I ^ 
 
 0) 
 
 05 
 
 r 
 
 •jjjsj(f 
 
 s f»- 
 
 •JRJllSUjS 
 
 •(P.llll^ 
 
 
 £• S b « 
 
 ^ 4> O *> 
 
 H >- >- ^ 
 
 •jiii.f 'anjs 
 
 H H >- 
 
 •j.injii,| 
 •r |iniii<,' 
 
 D 2 ^ ^ U 
 H ^ H r- h- 
 
 I ni^n-nt'ni.nt'n-ni ni Q^ 
 I r^jl'^r r r r r r r 
 
 nin-nrni nrn-'ni'ni'ni 
 
 n c^-c; c; 
 
 a *- 
 
 n n n n 
 r r TF 
 
 n:n n n: 
 r r r r 
 
 r-.c; C c sc 
 >' n n n n 
 ^ r r I r 
 
 pnrnrnrnr 
 
 
 ir 
 
 
 p.f-..,- 
 a •^ 
 
 SiT r'-r r-'r -r r rr- 
 
 n. nn n- n n n. n n. 
 
 33 J3.,Q:J3Lrji OlO- J3i Oi Qi 
 
 n 
 c 
 
 r 
 
 nn 
 
 n rz n n fz rz. 
 c c c c c c 
 
 I ol nil iDi cii fD| uni 
 • r:iJ rM rn- r» ' '^ ni 
 
 a *^ 
 
 n 
 
 r r r-r; 
 n 
 
 ' r r r^r 
 
 ' r r r=*r 
 
 Hi n, Hi Hi 
 
 n 
 
 
 ,Q, |%-J^:j^:j^.. 
 
 ' r r r r 
 
 n n n n 
 c c c c 
 
 o< fill mi oi 
 
 r r^r r- 
 n 
 
 ^/:\- a* G\i Cli Gil 
 
 r:
 
 147 
 
 ■ajtiinj 
 
 •|BJU|J 
 
 S 
 
 f^ . 
 
 
 >■> 
 
 >- S b 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 f> > > 
 
 :s 
 
 ■r 
 
 c: c q 
 
 *"*:. 
 
 M 
 
 
 f 1 
 
 f~ 
 
 J^.O .n 
 
 
 
 f C r 
 n n 
 
 1 
 
 ■)iiasajrf 3|diouJ»?,l "iSBfl sidiDijiPJ 
 
 ■""IS 
 
 •Ji'cT 
 
 ■.luis' •JUi^ 
 
 vi en so ^ 04 
 
 ■^ S c <» s 
 
 ^ § g J g 
 
 * fc fc. g fc. 
 
 {« cc 
 
 PL C- 
 
 0° c ^ E 
 
 « g CB = 
 
 S tl- S tu 
 
 r 
 
 rj: n-ri: n^n' 
 n Co F 
 
 13 p n p 
 
 n ? 
 
 a C 
 
 r-' n:n..n.'-' 
 i- r r r-' 
 
 n n 
 
 r 
 
 
 *- '- r r r 
 
 
 r. 
 
 53. 
 
 r 
 
 53:ii.53iif3 13 
 
 r r^^rr r 
 n Co £ 
 
 n 
 
 5^ 13= 13- 13= J:-'" 
 
 
 
 --j-:^ 
 
 |:=' 13:13 Q=P' 
 
 ^ f" *" n 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 Hi 
 ^• 
 13 
 
 r 
 
 13= 
 
 r 
 
 C.c; 
 
 c; c 
 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 c 
 
 13: 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 r r-p r 
 
 n. 13il3" 13il3' 
 Q ra Q •ci-Q 
 n_ ri: ni- />_■ '^ 
 
 n c^ r 
 
 r r 
 
 13-13i-n..O'- 
 
 13 13 13 13. 13- 
 
 C C C C-C 
 
 x^i r^i r-i r-.s^f 
 
 r r'-r r:.r- 
 n Co £ 
 
 .s 
 
 O
 
 148 
 
 o 
 
 ei 
 
 >;»• 
 
 
 rii 
 
 -TS 
 
 n 
 
 rt 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 ■4>j 
 
 a 
 
 CO 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 U3 
 
 A 
 
 en 
 
 5* 
 
 Is 
 
 S2h 
 
 m 
 
 'T3 
 
 rl' 
 
 r 
 
 I ri 
 
 Oi 
 
 r 
 
 •.wjaij 
 
 •|»"»lcf 
 
 'jeinSaii;; 
 
 •34ilBjadiui 
 
 •jnij -iJuis 
 
 'ajnjn^,] 
 
 •JBJllSUIS 
 
 qJ <J 2 2 
 
 M ^ H H 
 
 >-' H 
 
 >L_>i_^_jL H 
 
 
 H>< >< 
 
 2£f 251- as*- %^ ici- ssh aji asr ^1 
 
 ^ 13i J3 Q' 13i J3i 13 C* I J3i O' 
 
 « r r'-r r r r r r r 
 a " 
 
 3, S2i-2S"S2Kj5;:S5ivJCK55i;^:-^-: 
 f Qi Q- Q« Q' Hi Q Hi O' Q" 
 
 -= J- r^rrrr r r r 
 a 
 
 T' '^■' IJ'" T" '^'■' ''*■■■ T" •V'-r^:- 
 
 25> :«=• ^^ 5J- SSV 55:; :gi; ^;- 55iv 
 
 Di 
 
 r m n n' m m n~r\' Q^ 
 
 SC>- 5Ck 2C»- 25 ►^ 2Sk 2:f 25i 3Si 2s^ 
 
 . m n-ni ni ni n-ni t nt 
 « r r^r r r r r r r 
 
 a •" 
 
 -rn-. '-i:- »-n-. »-|:. *"»:• »"»:• '"«:• *"»:• *"»:• 
 
 _. aj:; 2S;-- 3K:; 2S:; 2S|: SS-: JK;: 25;; 25;: 
 * Hi r|~ni rii Hi Hi Hi Hi rji 
 
 ^r rT r r-rr r r 
 4 n c^c; c; - g C:P 
 
 2Sk aS" a:" 2S>^ 25k 2S^ 25i 2Ji 2S«- 
 
 Hi ni rii Hi Hi flKrii H' fli 
 
 n n^nn n n n n n- 
 n m^c c; '" c: c p 
 a " 
 
 *-|:- *-»:. #-!:• *-«:. #^.. »-».. «n:. »-»:. »n:' 
 
 25K 25;: 25;: 35 ;•• 25;: 25:; 25;: 25;: 25;- 
 
 „. rj n, Hi fi" Hi h, ri' ri' ri 
 « n n^n n n.n n n n 
 
 25: 25 25 25: 
 
 o n n « 
 rCrf 
 
 <u 2 2 
 ^ H H )_: 
 
 jr .c; .C .c; .% 
 r r r- 
 
 n'a5i-25h25^a5'- 
 
 r r r r 
 
 25« 25i-25i 25i 
 
 n n n n 
 
 n tZ: tz n 
 
 25'- 25.. 25*^25 •■ 
 
 25125-25 25. 
 
 C\. CI Cl- 
 
 c-'^" 
 
 n 
 
 25r25i"25i 25i- 
 
 n fi n n 
 fi fin fi^ 
 n 
 
 J5 q .1^ g; .25 
 
 ni 25 25 S ni 
 
 :c,tz fZ (Z^^' 
 
 iI:25K25K25'-25'- 
 
 - 11:11: CC: 
 
 5j C C L, 25 
 
 P^,25 25 25 ni 
 
 r n' rii n r 
 r r r- 
 
 $r;5:C:q:25: 
 
 n. 25^25^25- 25k 
 
 {-' n. n n rx: 
 
 ' r r r r 
 
 5j::c;=-c;=c;:.25:. 
 
 S'-2:::25::25;:25.s- 
 ^.Q .a Q Q 
 
 cT cr fn.ir- 
 
 n^ 32 '•25 •■25^25 •■ 
 
 _j-c n:n:nn"
 
 149 
 
 'dJll)UJ 
 
 IBJIlid 
 
 s &: 
 
 >- s 
 
 V W kT 
 
 >- >- 5 
 
 •aAUav J"38'>-'cI 'aAissBj jaasajd[ 
 
 ■n.iis 
 
 '■""rT 
 
 •"llMtJ "IHM 
 
 CO «3 
 
 
 as 0H CU 
 
 s s a 
 fa S fc. 
 
 Ki CO 
 
 0. (X 
 
 ^^ 52 2 25 
 
 ^ j; f" ^ '^ 
 n n 
 
 •2..C ,- 
 
 -C: x- V r- r- 
 n *" n 
 
 5'!.'^' '^^ '^^ V' 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 r 
 
 22 
 
 n 
 
 .n 
 
 .25 .55 .35 .35 .25 
 
 r r*TTr 
 n Co p 
 
 25 .35 .35 .35 .35 
 
 351:35;: 25> 25;- 
 
 r.OQ 
 
 25:; 35-:: 25:: 35-:: 
 
 '^ a c 
 
 '^ .'^ .c^ .'^ '5 
 
 S:35 2S 25 ^. 
 
 5v- r r r-' 
 
 n' 
 
 n' 
 
 r 
 
 S' 35-^ 35k 35.^^ 
 
 .: l:,: u,: I:,: •^■ 
 r 35-^ 35k 35.^^ 
 
 P n^ 
 
 35k 
 
 .Q 
 
 cr 
 
 25-, 
 
 i'^ 35r:35;:^= g" .C 
 
 n n 
 
 
 35 35 35 .35 35 
 
 H: n-n-Ln-n- 
 r r^r rr 
 
 n c a E 
 
 .35 .35 .25 .35 .^ 
 
 " HE 5:? 
 
 35:; 351: 35:-: 35:; 
 OkOi-QkQ; 
 
 
 3.3 
 
 35" 25 •• 25;: 35-:: 
 
 nt-fit-ni-nt. 
 Pa E 
 
 
 
 .2- a 
 c •" 
 
 -c 35i- 
 
 S or 
 
 «*■ 
 
 '-= ^ 
 
 n o 
 
 «^ b 
 
 •?« 
 
 ? ° 
 « o 
 
 .3 " 
 
 
 2 >• 
 « 351 
 
 03 
 
 351 
 
 r 
 
 <J 
 
 r- 
 
 
 ^.1 
 
 « 
 
 n- 
 
 
 r 
 
 o- 
 
 
 J 
 
 ^^ 
 
 > 
 
 B 
 
 !C 
 
 ti ■ 
 
 •- a 

 
 150 
 
 •JA]3l,f 
 
 •(' •"Id 
 
 s a 
 2 Jr r- 5- 
 
 MlilllnUlS 
 
 ^ s &: 
 
 
 > ? 
 
 h 5- > >. 
 
 « <u 2 S 
 
 ►n :? E s: 
 
 
 n 
 
 n n n n 
 n 
 
 ^ c::c;:i;:^: 
 " n n n n 
 
 '-I *-i 
 
 *-»*-» 'n 
 
 «, r'r~r'r'ri^^^i^i^i 
 
 n n r n- 
 
 n n ^ ^ 
 n 
 
 " n n n n 
 
 2 n n.n nn n n nn- 
 ^ - a — 
 
 n nn n 
 
 ' n n n n 
 
 n ni.n n n n n nn- 
 n Ckc c;.'- m e p 
 
 " n n nn 
 
 n n n n n n ri n n 
 := n .fi.nin«ni§.5,5i§i 
 ? ^ ^/^ ^-^ h n n n 
 
 n n n n 
 n n-f, n. 
 
 ;^ C c; c; ^ 
 
 '^ n n nn 
 
 a. 
 
 nnnnnnnnn 
 n n'-n n n n n rt n 
 
 £- c; c e :c 
 " n n n. n 
 
 nnnnnnnnn 
 
 n n^n-n n ri n.nn 
 n n^i-.-c;.'- n £:;? 
 a 
 
 « 
 
 n nn n- 
 
 n n- n n 
 n 
 
 
 n c g. 
 
 n n ri
 
 151 
 
 •ajiunj 
 
 
 •aAij.)V ni;»s^j^ 
 
 ■1AIl.>V »''^'''»«,I 
 
 
 •\niaid 
 
 ■p 
 
 •auts- 'i»\d 
 
 •3U!S -JIMd 
 
 
 They M. 
 They F. 
 
 YeP. 
 We. 
 
 »3 cc aj Oh' C^ 
 
 1 1 1 1 1 
 
 «j w SU fc 
 S S S E 
 
 S Ch S ^ 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 n c a c 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 .*"• .'"' .'^ .*"* 
 
 n n^n n 
 n b £ 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 13 J3|13;J3 13 
 
 n Q a Q 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 f^ a £ 
 
 
 :?- e e c; P 
 n rirf, n n 
 
 n 
 h 
 
 o .p 9 p 9 
 
 
 
 »^ IT e c; p 
 
 n 
 
 rr- 
 
 n 
 
 i.'^^- 
 
 1 
 
 « n o J3 
 
 
 J- c e c p 
 1? n n n"* 
 
 n 
 
 Q O O 013. 
 
 mm. 
 
 ■- o Q C 
 
 
 
 . 1 -r* 
 Q ^
 
 152 
 
 •J,n:>Jrf 
 
 •aAnw.ndiuj 
 
 ■ajuiiij 
 
 •ji!|>i?;!iis •p..in|^ 
 
 Mll|,| '''UlS 
 
 •j'.|n3t»is 
 
 HeM. 
 She F. 
 ThouM. 
 Thou F. 
 IC. 
 They C. 
 YeM. 
 YeF. 
 WeC. 
 
 Thou M. 
 Thou F. 
 YeM. 
 YeF. 
 
 He 
 She 
 
 Thou M. 
 Thou F. 
 IC. 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 a 
 
 n_ n. n^ Hi.. 
 a a ^a 
 
 n. .n_ J^ n_ J^ ri_ n_ 
 
 a 5^0 5 n 6 5 
 
 ''- c^c E *" E 
 a 
 
 J — . 
 
 n n n n 
 n 
 
 •Jz III. /n. isi- /li- 
 '^ a 5 5 Q 
 
 n_ n_ n n_ n_ n_ n_;/i_ n_ 
 > a Q'-O O O Q f3.0 Q 
 
 a QQ Q 
 n 
 
 •y^ ti- f^ n^f^ 
 
 
 a a J3 a 
 
 n= n: r n n tz n='r:'i?:= 
 ^ h nwh h n n hsn in 
 
 
 
 
 n n ft.nn-n n n n 
 ^ n n-n-nn.n n n n 
 
 ) . 
 
 s: ^ ^ ^ ^ 
 'n nan 
 
 _i 
 
 n 
 
 ^ c c c-c c c C PC 
 
 a n_ n- n- n_. n_ n_ p. .p- J^ 
 
 t a o'-Q n n Q q q-o 
 
 rt n rx 
 n 
 
 c 5 "^ t 
 
 n
 
 i5:i 
 
 •ajiunj 
 
 ►5 
 
 •3AU.>V ■'■'^<I 
 
 
 i 
 
 •|Bjnij 
 
 •8u!s niicT 
 
 «^ 
 
 They M. 
 They F. 
 
 YeF. 
 We. 
 
 73 »^ Ph" 0^ 
 « 53 »: S 
 
 2= tu S &- 
 
 en «3 A P^' 
 
 i s ?' S 
 
 n 
 n: 
 
 
 a 
 
 n± Hl^ nJ- ni- 
 
 a Qi-n n 
 
 r-Q£ 
 
 la 
 2 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 ^|.»n..^T-*-l" 
 
 r^ f2:- Hi- n. 
 
 1 -r- r- -r- 
 
 •§ 
 
 o 
 
 •13 
 
 ■r- rL. n_ n- 1= 
 5?^ CI J3 Q " 
 
 n n 
 
 5: 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 j\ e c; c cj 
 
 .J=- Hi- n_ n_ .p- 
 ^* Q O Q " 
 *-«f »T- ,-,1- 
 
 n n 
 
 n. 
 
 §' 
 
 
 ^ « 13 a 
 
 J^ n_ ri_ !>_ 
 ^ a £ 
 
 "a 
 o 
 
 
 h 
 
 13 Q: O- n- 
 
 h h>-hh 
 f^ a £ 
 
 
 a 
 J 
 
 ^ c; c: c: P 
 
 ^ n-n n ** 
 
 n 
 n 
 
 
 Q p p Q 
 
 n n^nn 
 <:&£ 
 
 o 
 w 
 
 •a 
 
 5 
 a 
 
 i 
 
 f-.c; g; n; 22 
 
 n 
 c 
 
 C C C C 
 n n n n 
 
 
 >• 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 ■r
 
 154 
 
 •njjja 
 
 *3Ai)eMdu<] 
 
 
 V»JlliUJ 
 
 •JBIII^i'llS 'irjUlj^ 
 
 •J"I.I •i'"!S 
 
 
 -.KinSHiK 
 
 
 She F. 
 Thou M. 
 Thou F. 
 IC. 
 They C. 
 YeM. 
 YeF. 
 WeC. 
 
 Thou M. 
 Thou F. 
 YeM. 
 YeF. 
 
 
 She 
 
 Thou M. 
 Tliou F. 
 IC. 
 
 o 3g as'-% sc :s as ;5 52 is 
 
 ^ n c^q c -^ c c :5 
 
 j-:r-r r: 
 :& % as 2c- 
 
 ;^:.i:; CC^- 
 * js 52 as % 
 
 «-,, #-|. .rn. »~%. 'n. #T 'n. «-»• *-|. 
 
 -? ri:- ri:* n::" ri:- 1^ .. f>_.. n:- rii- fi^- 
 
 rut- n^ r^ f^ 
 r-r- r r 
 as as- as as- 
 
 •- rr- t--\\. 
 
 
 n* o- J3- o- o- i3 n- Q- o- 
 
 ;?»: >|. >»: >^: X: >^-:*|: >l: ><: 
 
 as as^as-as-as-as as-as-as- 
 
 n c^c c *" c c p 
 
 as as- as as- 
 
 ^ as as as ^ 
 
 Sjasasi-asasasasasasas 
 
 a 
 
 •^ as as as as 
 
 o.J^..n•^.J3 J3 o 13 Q 
 
 jn. >». t^: >»: ^^: JA- ^^: t'*: >i: 
 
 ^ «^ as as as *^ as as as 
 ^ ^^C-^C C^ C C P 
 
 n'nmin. 
 Q J3 no 
 
 M:Jyt..V«..>»: 
 
 as as- as as- 
 
 n 
 
 h.Q o Q Q 
 ^ tA- >\. yt. tA. 
 
 ^ as at as. as 
 
 -• Q n o Q Q Q J3 o Q 
 ?f, ;>»i.?^";'«= J^= •'»• i^- •^' ^^= i^= 
 ? as as- as as as as as as as 
 f n c-c; c *" C £:^ 
 
 nn r n r r nnn 
 
 q c ; c c C; c c q. q 
 
 CI: CI" CI: CI: CI: Cl: C|: CI' C|: 
 
 as as-as-as ^ ^ as-as-as- 
 
 n q-q q -^ q EiP 
 
 h'q-q-q-asK 
 ^Ji;Q Q Q p 
 ^ I'll, j/^i- J'* ...>»». 
 ^ as as as. as 
 
 n n rn 
 q-q q q 
 r'r'nr, 
 
 C|: CI-CI-CI:. 
 
 as as- as as- 
 
 r q q q «- 
 PiQ Q Q c: 
 
 ci:r'r"r'ri 
 
 ;g CI: S= CI-CI: 
 
 as 55 as as
 
 1^5 
 
 'dimnjl 
 
 j^ -aAlJDV ■J-"'cl *3A!SV»d 'JJBtl 1 
 
 •IBJuid; 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 t5 
 
 •aaig *jnyf I 'Snig "JMIH | 
 
 They M. 
 They F. 
 
 YeF. 
 VVc. 
 
 CO CO p; &; 
 1 M ^^ 
 
 la; fc, g Pk 
 
 »D tK Ol fl< 
 
 1 s « i 
 
 !g &u S fs. 
 
 r r r r fl"^ 
 ^ 55755 a:-^ 
 
 tt n 
 
 r 
 
 n. Q- /I. n> 
 55 55.55 55 
 
 r r r r 
 
 55 ^'■55^ 
 
 g Ik £ S:& 
 
 n 
 r: 
 
 55 
 
 
 »-|. .rn. *-»• «T 
 
 r-r-r-r- 
 
 55 55-55-^ 
 
 
 r« 
 
 55 
 
 i3. Q'O'Qi 
 55 55-55 55 
 
 '^ a £ 
 
 
 ^55-55 55-^ 
 
 23.- 
 >> 
 
 
 J3 Q n o 
 53-53 Q.Ci. 
 
 55 55-55-55 
 
 J;^ a Q J3 g 
 n •" n 
 
 n. 
 
 i3 
 
 5: 
 
 ^^• j^. i^. j>»- 
 
 55 55'^5:. $: 
 
 nb£ 
 
 
 i|;.g..g;| 
 
 ^ 55 55 55 ^ 
 
 53" 
 
 
 53.53k53-53- 
 53 53 53 53 
 
 55 55.55-55 
 
 i' ri i' ri|: 
 ... p.^ g. 
 
 n 
 c 
 
 r' 
 
 55 
 
 Q- n- on- 
 ce cc 
 r' r'nri 
 la: m c>..£n-. 
 
 55 55-55 55 
 
 
 •5 55- 
 
 S pi- 
 
 2 -B 
 
 55 I' 
 
 6C ♦J 
 
 JS 55 
 
 5 n 
 
 *~ •«— a 
 
 .a 

 
 150 
 
 M.»13l^ 
 
 S fa 
 s a 
 aJ 2 2 
 
 MK|n3uis 
 
 ?? S fa 
 
 4- 2 ^ -= 
 
 
 •aAilHJodniY 
 
 S fa' . 
 
 •a.inin^.| 
 jc|ii.iais' 
 
 S fa 
 
 s s 
 4, flJ 2 2 
 
 " ^ "" H I-- 
 
 SI 3: 
 
 
 
 ninrn'.ni' 
 
 
 
 
 «-i_ *n. cj- *n' *"«• '^• 
 
 poc C 
 
 a "^ 
 
 5 '""C''~'^C'' 
 '- n n - fi 
 
 « 
 
 «-«. .,^. ,^. <-i. *^. *n. *^. *^. *n. 
 
 n 
 
 n' 
 
 l^:■'^i •n' «ni *^i 
 
 '- fl n ^ n 
 
 _. -Tt-r^-j^: J^iJ^:_r•,_r•=-/^^J^• 
 5 11 '^ a — 
 
 _/N|. 
 
 n 
 
 '- n n ^ 
 
 r n:.n.n n n 
 ^- r r..r r r r 
 
 ft. J_ «- 
 
 S 
 
 n 
 r 
 
 h 
 a 
 
 n n. 
 r- r ■ 
 
 r r r r 
 
 j^Lei C" mi isi 
 *- n n ^ n 
 
 
 •rr .rT-«-|-*-i..#-» 
 
 '^..*^..^^. 
 
 00 f— g— .— » •- ^ *~ *- — V 
 
 '- n n '^ n 
 
 •a 
 
 n.n n.n n n n n r 
 rt-i"*-i''-ri.r'-c:«' ;^! cj! ;?! 
 
 J^^^oc c c c ;p 
 
 ^' -ni r?' ^' I J^:-C»< '^' '^i s?i 
 
 n - *" PiHJ *" n n '^ n
 
 157 
 
 •ajiunj 1 j 
 
 •dAii^v ■'"'rT 
 
 •aAissv^ M-iCfl 
 
 a 
 
 •|Bjiiia 1 
 
 > 
 
 ■;t(llS Mlllrt 
 
 •3HIS -JlWa 
 
 
 They M. 
 They F. 
 YeM. 
 YeF. 
 We. 
 
 wj c« a; &; 
 
 1 i a e 
 
 g fe g fa 
 
 M5 CC 0." P^ 
 
 1 i 1 i 
 
 S tu 2 fc 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 pVC G C pi 
 
 r:i' 
 
 £ 
 
 'n *^ '^ *-« 
 
 
 cs 
 
 o 
 u 
 
 w 
 
 a. 
 
 j^kc e c; pi. 
 
 n 
 £ 
 
 
 *^. *n' *-». *-«. 
 
 n n a £ 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 
 £ 
 
 *^^ 'ni 'ni *~J" 
 
 n r. a E 
 
 
 ■fc» 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 s 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 >■ 
 
 f,?e-;e-.e-.?!:i 
 
 r~- *T '^■■ *~s-" rs:. 
 
 £ 
 
 
 n n a £ 
 
 ic r r r L.. 
 
 Hi 
 
 r 
 
 £ 
 
 f-- r- r r ■ 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 nhPt-ri'-Q'- 
 
 *^..*^..T•*^•• 
 
 n n a c 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 Is 
 
 f- c c; c; p 
 n n 
 
 n 
 c 
 
 £ 
 
 J3 O Q Q 
 
 j;J!.Pkr^!.P' 
 n n a £ 
 
 
 o 
 S 
 
 u 
 
 ja 
 
 \ 
 
 u 
 
 §
 
 15B 
 
 " 
 
 
 M-najj 
 
 
 
 •<»\H«,i.niai( 
 
 •,)imii.| 
 
 
 •JB|tlHu 
 
 >S 
 
 
 
 •I« 
 
 "IcT 
 
 •. 
 
 "»!ci 
 
 •Sins; 
 
 •j;.|nr'i;s 
 
 
 B 
 
 5 
 
 U 
 
 
 >- 
 
 YeF. 
 WeC. 
 
 
 e 
 o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 She 
 
 Thou M. 
 Thou F. 
 
 d 
 
 go Qi Qi Di O' Qi Di Di Di Qi 
 
 = nri>-nn(iinririn 
 s ^ a — 
 
 Q Q Q Q 
 
 ^ ? 5 S; 
 
 r. 
 
 i^ D D D O 
 
 #-1 •#" .r— ■*~ '*~ 
 
 '^ n r\ nn 
 
 r-\\- r-\\- m-^..t-\ ..r~\..r-\v r-\..tf-\,..r-\. 
 
 -• 0<0> OiOi Oi OiOi QiDi 
 
 Sd n '^^^ n p ri n n n 
 a — 
 
 C-C C 
 
 r n nn 
 
 n n- n r\. 
 
 n 
 
 n nil Q. di Qi 
 
 .Q Q Q Q Q Q a Q Q 
 
 r\- n rii m ni n-ny n- ni 
 n G^c c; *" e c.p 
 
 J3 — 
 
 Q Q Q 9 
 
 n n- n '^~ 
 n 
 
 Q g: c: C"^' 
 n .a Q ^ S 
 ^ n n n n 
 
 .Q Q Q Q Q Q Q .Q fj 
 
 ni n~ni ni n' n-ni ni ni 
 n n>-n n-n n nnn- 
 n m^c; c;'- c.i; p 
 
 a — 
 
 p, c n; q 551 
 *^ n n n.r\ 
 
 _. OtOOQ, Q 0=0.Q0 
 
 5> '"J p-h n h P.P P P 
 
 n n.^ n^ 
 
 O: 
 
 n 
 
 C:D. Q: Q: 
 
 n n n n 
 
 Qi Oi O' Oi O' Oi Qi Oi Oi 
 
 nni-nnnnnnn 
 
 '^ £.£ £ " £: & P 
 a 
 
 i.£^ 
 
 n n p- 1 
 
 n nn r~ r~ r. r.n r.- 
 
 ^ Q.Q..D Q O O O D O 
 
 4 c c ^ q c ^ c c e 
 ^ ri: n-ni rti ni n ni Hi n' 
 g. n n^n n n p n n n 
 
 o 
 
 c; c; t; c 
 
 ■r- •»— •#— r- 
 
 n-nnn- 
 n nn n^ 
 
 n 
 
 ^ '^ n n c: 
 
 ri=h:n 
 n n n- 
 
 n: 
 n
 
 159 
 
 
 2 b. . 
 
 ?> ?:» S fc 
 
 
 >- > p 
 
 •aAnay 'ijb^ 
 
 'Sens' 
 
 ■«"'jT 
 
 tl, 0H 
 
 &■ g [b 
 
 '3AISS8J 'JJSd 
 
 CO w: D.' C 
 « e «• s 
 g I g I 
 
 ^ O. Q O i=* 
 
 n 
 
 p Q O Q 
 
 '^ a £ 
 
 Q'-Q-OO 
 
 n n n n 
 '^ a E 
 
 F\\ C* C- C- JrJ; 
 
 Jr-' n: n n '' 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 n 
 
 mono 
 a a Q a 
 n= n n n 
 n rinn n 
 
 f-aE 
 
 Q« oi Qi or 
 n florin 
 
 ^^ S o 3 
 
 P n.n n '^ 
 n n 
 
 Q 
 
 n 
 
 O J3 O J3 
 .O Q a Q 
 
 n n^n n 
 
 5^4 o. Q: o 2 
 
 0| 
 
 n 
 
 n' 
 
 n' 
 
 n- 
 
 n n 
 
 Q 
 
 H: 
 
 O. Q 
 
 u- 
 
 n 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 c 
 
 p- c; m c P 
 
 S'B.o.S-S' 
 
 n n 
 
 n 
 
 p p p n 
 
 Q'-OiSiO' 
 
 n n^n. n 
 
 f— *- -r- 
 
 *- a r 
 
 ^ c c: c !5 
 Jr? n n nJ^ 
 
 n 
 
 E^ 
 
 n. 
 
 D., 
 
 c 
 
 ■r— 
 
 rt: 
 
 n 
 
 Q O Q O 
 Q Q Q.O- 
 
 e ^ m c 
 
 n n.n 
 
 ^- a P 
 
 n: 
 n
 
 1(30 
 
 •J^jajj 
 
 •AMlR.iatluIJ 
 
 •ajtuuj 
 
 •|eiuu ■jv|u:^nig 
 
 •juij -fluis' 
 
 •iBiirnis 
 
 He. 
 She. 
 
 Thou M. 
 Thou F. 
 I. 
 They. 
 
 YeF. 
 We. 
 
 S fa . 
 h H >- >. 
 
 i si 1 1 
 
 E K P H ^- 
 
 s r r^r r r' r r r r 
 
 la-ia'-ia- «a 
 
 m- m: m^im- 
 
 F r r '~ 
 
 
 ir r'r r r r C r 
 n •- - ;^ 1= h n 
 
 »:- ,_ #7- 
 
 lahia- c\- 
 m.m_ m_ 
 
 r r r 
 
 
 #-«■». m-ia ci.c) m-ia- m m 
 
 p ri± nJ" nJ riJ fM mi- m •■ m ' 
 
 " £r^r^r r r r r r 
 
 <ai-ia- xa- 
 m_ m^- m- 
 r r r 
 
 pvV. xa xa-xa- 
 
 r_ p, p p:. 
 
 i- «5 r^*- n^ nl nl m> 
 
 
 Cl- C- 2S- 
 
 mi- Q: Q 
 r^- mi" riir 
 
 rr- r r 
 
 <a-ci" xa.'/a- ci; 
 n' ^i- m> m_^ mJ m> mJ 
 
 
 Pi 1 
 
 p «r'r!.r r r p 
 spn ciC r;- c 
 p pp-^' *" p- 
 
 lahxa*- xa*- 
 
 p:|-. r- 
 
 ^ p p 
 
 mj xa • ^•• 
 r X5^ Or- 
 
 p r- r 
 p' p" 
 
 _i fM-m>-mJmi mj- mJ 
 
 P .ri^r.r r r r 
 
 ,up c e^c; ;:; c 
 
 xai-xa- xa 
 
 m^- ri_- xn.:- 
 r r' r 
 
 xa c; c;. 
 
 p!.. xa- xa-. 
 
 U r r- 
 '" P P 
 
 la-ia • in-ci" xa- 
 , m 1 m± r^ i mJ* mJ 
 
 ^ sr ri r r r 
 JIJ =n=C^ C f^, p 
 
 
 r^. X2J- rij- 
 
 a (^ ^ 
 a a 
 
 la-ta • ia, la • la 
 
 . mJ mj- mJ m_ mJ 
 
 CLgn:.!:; c; -, p 
 
 
 
 iaia£a,ia;ja-ia;' ja- la- 
 
 :^mj-mJ-mJmJmJmJ mi mi 
 
 a '^r^r^r r rr r- r 
 ,Ea c c-^c; n; p c; p 
 
 xai-xah xa. 
 r=r r 
 ° a 5 
 
 !-■ x>_ m:-m- 
 
 . la-Qjia-ia la-ia • la- ci- 
 
 •— r/mj-m.'"mj mi mi mj- mJ '^ 
 1 pr^r'^r r r r r r 
 
 la^ra- xa. 
 ri-m.:- m^- 
 r r r 

 
 
 s &: 
 
 S' <*; ta . 
 r- >- >< ^ 
 
 •jAiioy 'uRff 
 
 ■SiijS 
 
 mirf 
 
 £ S S 
 
 fc. S fa 
 
 •Suit; "Jui^"" 
 
 ?i C- C '^" '^' 
 5? Q J=; Q CI 
 
 i- p,r r r 
 
 a*- 
 
 
 m.ia xa ci 
 r r»^r r 
 
 n 
 
 a c 
 
 zii- /:>^ /2_ /p- 
 r r^r F 
 
 n 
 
 a C 
 
 r 
 
 n 
 
 .£a CI .la m 
 r r r=r 
 
 ^ 5 t E. 
 
 CI c» m -^ 
 n_ /:i- /:i_ ;=- 
 
 F r^r^Jr 
 
 "^ Q ^ Q* 
 
 
 
 n- 
 
 H"^ n*^ 
 
 rz' 
 
 01-1 -Ci) .d.-iH .HI 
 
 n: I n- ni nj n^ 
 
 r«- r'-r r-r 
 r. I- ^ n.£.. 
 
 n> n. n_ {=- 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 r-r ri r 
 
 m-cvia..^ 
 
 Hl- n_ n_ 
 
 n. 
 
 
 ci'-S:. 
 
 
 i5»v .CI CI CI .CI 
 
 r= r r r r 
 
 cici CI ci- 
 ri- n. n_ •=:- 
 
 F F^FT 
 
 CI '^ 
 
 CI 
 
 r 
 
 
 CI" 
 
 r 
 
 d*- .CI .CI. CI CI I CI -CI CI 
 
 r 
 
 ci. 
 
 Clf 
 
 r 
 
 n_ ni itL:- rii- 1 rL n_ rL J=- 
 
 Pf;r'r Ir'F F-r 
 
 .CI .CI .CI .CI 
 
 rr rr 
 
 rt e^ t-i, 
 
 i; F^F p 
 
 pg. 
 
 t r 
 
 " a 
 
 CI: 
 nJ- 
 
 r- 
 
 O:- 
 
 a 
 
 Cl»- 
 
 r- 
 n: 
 a 
 
 CI CI CI .CI 
 
 fiz- ni' ri:- <-^- 
 
 r rir r 
 
 ° h a S 
 a n: 
 
 CI.CI.. 
 
 — FT- 
 
 a r> 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 r 
 
 ci». 
 
 n:- 
 r 
 
 .CI .CI .CI .CI 
 
 rLi-f^n-n- 
 
 rr'rr 
 
 n= 
 
 n'- 
 
 ci-ci- 
 
 p:pl 
 
 F r 
 
 *~h: 
 
 
 F:' 
 
 /Ij 
 
 • U- 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 ••- 
 en- 
 
 X. 
 
 ri- 
 
 CI 
 
 r 
 
 /^ 
 
 
 r 
 
 n_: 
 r 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 Clw 
 
 a 
 
 •CI .CI .CI CI 
 
 a 
 
 C< CI- 
 
 a 
 
 CI" 
 
 r i- 
 
 a ri 
 o 
 
 CI- 
 
 r 
 
 CI- 
 
 r- 
 
 a*- 
 n: 
 
 •CI CI CI CI 
 
 r^r r r 
 
 CI CI 
 
 ri_n_ 
 p.p. 
 
 CI CI 
 
 F r 
 he 
 
 1=;
 
 162 
 
 Rule 102. — Example of a defective verb, 
 ^ foi its first ladical. 
 
 with 
 
 rliiph-i'.gal. 
 
 nmii 
 
 Hiph-ML'iJ. 
 
 N i{tli-ugal. 
 
 K»l. 
 
 — T 
 
 tZ 
 
 5b 
 
 Ho. 
 She. 
 
 Hioii M. 
 Thou F. 
 I. 
 
 They. 
 Ye M. 
 YeF. 
 We. 
 
 ^0 
 
 
 s 
 
 e 
 2S 
 
 
 u 
 
 ce 
 
 "5 
 PES 
 
 
 Thou M. 
 Thuu F. 
 YeM. 
 YeF. 
 
 Si 
 
 ■J. 
 
 it 
 > 
 
 a. 
 £ 
 
 
 
 cd 
 
 
 He. 
 
 She. 
 
 Thou M. 
 Thou F. 
 I. 
 
 They M. 
 They F. 
 Ye M. 
 YeF. 
 We. 
 
 'C 
 
 3 
 
 C 
 
 k 
 
 ta 
 
 ^^•? 
 
 0\^r} 
 
 Kigiilnr. 
 
 V V 
 
 fnfi'iif've. 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 PC 
 
 Mas. S. 
 Fem. ii. 
 F«m. 'S. 
 Mas. P. 
 Fem. P. 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 
 
 Note.— ^-^'Q ^VD 3'"* ^J-'SDH «ie rcgnlaiij declined.
 
 A COMPENDIOUS 
 
 CHALDAIC GRAMMAR, 
 
 INTENDED to enable the reader to understand 
 that part of the bible ( written in that language) 
 comprised in Daniel, Ezra, and one verse in 
 Jeremiah, making two hundred and sixty-eight 
 verses ; besides several distinct words in diffe- 
 rent parts of the Pentateuch.* 
 
 * In the preface to the Hebrew Grammar, page vi. 
 there is a remark made on the antiquity of that language, 
 shewing that the same was preserved in its pure state after 
 the confusion of tongues, by Abraham, son of rf^ri Terach, 
 who inhabited the land of Chaldee ; Genesis, ch. x. and 
 xi. After the departure of Abraham and his family from 
 that country by the command of God, (Gen. ch. xii. v. 1) 
 lini IVochour, his brother, being left behind, confounded 
 the Hebrew into a dialect, to which he gave the name of 
 the country he lived in — the ('haldee ; and as the Hebrew 
 icmained in the family of Abraham, so did the Chaldee in 
 that of Nachor. See Genesis, chap. xxxi. vcr. 47, " And 
 Laban (grandson of Nachor) called it Nn^lilfit^ 1^] a pure 
 Chaldaic word ;" j^eg-ar, a heap, and sohadootka, of testi- 
 mony; and Jacob called it "TJ/^^ i* e. ga/, a heap, r. ^7^ 
 and ngied} a testimony, r. "liy. Hence it is manifest that
 
 The difference between the Chaklee and He- 
 brew chiefly consists in the etymology, owing 
 to the change of" letters and vowels in the same 
 word. 
 
 The number, shape, and power of the letters^ 
 as also those of the vowel points, are the same, 
 without exception, as in the Hebrew. See note. 
 
 the Chalclee language^ from its gfeatcr similarity to Ihd 
 Hebrew than any other, was first spoken in the family of 
 Terach, descended from "^IlV ngebcr, who, as related in 
 Genesis, chap. x. yer. 21, had two sons, the one he pro- 
 phetically named JyD Peleg, signifying a division, from 
 JlSe he divided, saying, \'^^r\ HJ'^Di VD»n ^3 " For in 
 his days (see Yarchi, the year he died) the earth became 
 divided," after the confusion of tongues, into different 
 nations, according to the language of each family ; the 
 Hebrew then remained in the family of *)^J^ down to WyTS 
 Terach, the father of Abraham, Nachor, &c. Genesis, 
 chapter xi. verse 25. By Abraham it was preserved in its 
 pure original state. See preface to Hebrew Grammar. — 
 When he left his native land (Genesis, chap. xi. ver. 31, 
 again, chap. xii. ver. 4) he took all his family with him, 
 except his brother Nachor, whom he left behind : the 
 knowledge he still possessed of his mother tongue, namely 
 the letters, vowels, &c. was soon converted into a different 
 dialect, which he named after the country he inhabited — 
 the Chaldce— Hebrew, DHtS^D n^J< the valley of Casdim, 
 named after the name of one of his sons, Genesis, chap, 
 xxii. ver. 22, "lCy3 ^\^^ " And Cesed," &c. This Ian- 
 guagc was soon after known by the name of D1JI")ri signify- 
 ing explanation, being as it were an explanation of the 
 Hebrew ; and it is considered as one of the nlost faithful 
 comments on that sacred language.
 
 RULE 1.— ON THE CHANGE OF LETTERS. 
 
 Chal. 
 
 Heb. 
 
 Chal. 
 
 Heb. 
 
 
 Nnnjoy. 
 
 *?nniron. 
 
 ' 2 and pas V2I^ fo^ 
 
 tpri he made 
 *' ;• • right. 
 7\S>. he went. 
 
 J— >-nn53— 
 
 r)^15jl brimstone 
 
 o—'0- "i3p — 
 
 *1D2^ watched 
 
 1 — to- nsD— 
 
 nil"! scandal. 
 
 3^— K xvi 
 
 rj; a tree. 
 
 n— K- KniD— 
 
 nniD »'o°'*- 
 
 X—y- ynx 
 
 X^^ earth. 
 
 1— K- n^^p— 
 
 
 
 T*'p summer. 
 nVij< 'and. 
 
 D — }- i^yo — 
 
 t3»J3 lime. 
 
 fit^ — n rh'r\ 
 
 ti^^ti^ tree. 
 
 » — K- c>n — 
 
 t^J^*^ head. 
 
 n — to- nyp — 
 
 nvn to en- 
 
 T T 
 
 Rule ^, — i* is often omitted at the beginning 
 of a word ; as, "^D for "^HK one, ^1 for ^^^^ man ; 
 V and ri at the end ; as, ^P V^p seven, *? for 
 r)*5 a house, &:c. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Rule 3. — The Chaldee has three parts of 
 speech, like the Hebrew, viz. ^^ a noun, ^^? 
 a verb, and ^t^ a word. 
 
 OF GENDER AND NUMBER. 
 
 n Rule 4. — All nouns are of the masculine 
 gender, excepting those ending in ^?^ ^^ ^?0 11^ 
 ni and r)\ ; as, {<??n wisdom, ^"J^n destruction, 
 Knp"TV justice, niD7D kingdom, rilSv prayer, 
 n»>y dunghill. ii.i
 
 Rule 5. — ^, the termination of the feminine 
 gender, is often omitted ; as, 2Vp 1*7]; ^^1J. 
 
 Rule 6. — Three numbers, the singular, plu- 
 ral, and dual, distinguished by their ending ; 
 thus, the plural masculine by adding to the sin- 
 gular]*., the dual in I*, or?.., the feminine by 
 changing ^^^ intol^ ; the difference between the 
 absolute and construction is the same as in the 
 Hebrew. 
 
 RULE 7.— AN EXAMPLE OF NOUNS. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Absolute. 
 Sing. T a hand, 
 Plural tn"» hands. 
 
 '• TT 
 
 Feminine. 
 Sing. J^Dpn wisdom, 
 
 Construction. 
 
 Plural ]D2n 
 
 *"1* the hands of. 
 
 n^Dn the wisdom of, 
 
 The dual in both genders adds T.. to the sin- 
 gular, except the feminine, when ^^ or "' is 
 changed to ^ ; thus, mas. dual T.'X two hands, 
 fern, dual I!C^^? two hundred. 
 
 Rule 8. — Some nouns are in the masculine 
 singular, as ^^ a father, and in the feminine 
 plural, as IC?^ or V"??^ fathers ; some are in the 
 
 singular feminine, as ^^/P or 5^;P a word, and 
 in the plural masculine, as V^P words.
 
 & 
 
 OF CASES. 
 
 Rule 9. — The Chaldee has five cases, prefixed 
 like-those in the Hebrew, viz. 
 
 Nora. 
 
 
 1^9 
 
 Gen. n or 
 
 lot 
 
 l!2P'T 
 
 Dat. 7 
 
 "to. 
 
 V-^i 
 
 Ace. h 
 
 a. 
 
 "pan' 
 
 -•! i 
 
 from. 
 
 l^ap 
 
 in or on. 
 
 to? 
 
 a king, 
 of a king, 
 to a king, 
 a king. 
 
 from a king. ' 
 in or on a king. 
 
 Rule 10. — The vocative, instead of placing "^ 
 before the noun, they put ^^ after ; as, sing.>^3^-P 
 
 O, or this king ; plur. ^/d7P these, or O kings ; 
 this ^^ is also used instead of ^ demonstrative 
 or emphatic, as ^1?P for "^^^D this or that book, 
 mas. sing.; plur. ^^-^P these books; the femi- 
 nine terminates in J*9t ? as ^^^^^^Q O, or that 
 wisdom. 
 
 Rule 1 1. — Nouns ending in HI or Hi form the 
 plural absolute in IJ, emphatic in ^^^I3^ as sing. 
 niD^p, plur. iJS^P, emphatic ^r\}f?^' 
 
 Rule 1^. — ^ demonstrative or emphatic is 
 only joined to the pronouns of the third person, 
 
 asf^innhe, Vi?^^'^they, these, &;c.
 
 6 
 
 RULE 13.— OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 Separable. 
 
 iNSEPAHABLiE TO NoUNS. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Flmal. 
 
 Ageitt. 
 
 Pat. , 
 
 Pessea. 
 
 1 C. 
 
 k:n or n:iK 
 
 » t 1^ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 I. 
 
 Me. 
 
 My. 
 
 2 M. 
 2 F. 
 
 nhjt* or r\H 
 
 
 0» 
 
 Thou. 
 Thon. 
 
 Thee. 
 Tliee. 
 
 Thy. 
 Thy. 
 
 3 M. 
 
 ?<in or 'in^K ^^J^^^ 
 
 n »n n^ 
 
 »ni 
 
 He. 
 
 Him. 
 
 His. 
 
 3 F. 
 
 ^<^n ^n*f? 
 
 T T T 
 
 T •• 
 
 She. 
 
 Her. 
 
 Hers. 
 
 1 c. 
 
 « M. 
 
 2 F. 
 
 a M. 
 
 3 F. 
 
 
 PD ]1D 
 
 ]ln Din ]ii 
 
 in'.." 
 
 We. 
 
 Ye. 
 
 Ye. 
 
 They. 
 They. 
 
 Us. 
 
 Yoa. 
 
 Yon. 
 
 'Ihein 
 
 Them 
 
 Our. 
 
 Your. 
 
 Ywir. 
 
 Their 
 Their 
 
 Rule 14.— 
 
 An example of a noun 
 
 with the pronoun affixes. 
 
 Siognlar. 
 
 
 Phiral. 
 
 1^.P 
 
 A king. 
 
 
 DoSp 
 
 Kings. 
 
 'dSd 
 
 My king. 
 
 1 C. 
 
 07D 
 
 M> kings. 
 
 1?"?^ 
 
 Thy king. 
 
 2 M. 
 
 1!??'^ 
 
 Tliy kings. 
 
 137P- 
 
 Thy king. 
 
 2 F. 
 
 'yi'ii 
 
 Thy kiiigkif 
 
 ns'i'/!: 
 
 His king. 
 
 3 M. 
 
 ^nis^/':: 
 
 HtS kingS,;;^ 
 
 nD7D 
 
 Her king. 
 
 3 F. 
 
 KHS^D 
 
 Her kings. 
 
 k^sSd 
 
 Onr king. 
 
 1 C. 
 
 J^P'?^^ 
 
 Our kings. 
 
 li^??? 
 
 Your king. 
 
 2 M. 
 
 ]'^y?7^ 
 
 Your kings. 
 
 P37D 
 
 Your king. 
 
 2 F. 
 
 P'37'^ 
 
 Yonr king!*. 
 
 r^n379 
 
 Their king. 
 
 3 M. 
 
 I'in'sSD 
 
 Their kings. 
 
 in??^ 
 
 Their king. 
 
 S F. 
 
 I'T?^'^ 
 
 Their king<. 
 
 Rule 15. — -Nouns feminine take the same 
 affixes, as I'inril^V their prayer, like l^^UK their 
 father.
 
 RULE 16.— DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 Nooiiuative. 
 
 Gen. n of. 
 
 Dat. "5 to. 
 
 Ace.nj 
 
 Abl. P fro 
 
 ,n. ^ in or on. 
 
 I c. t^:^? 
 
 !77 n'7 
 
 h 
 
 ' ♦n^ 
 
 0^0 
 
 *n 
 
 MeC. 
 
 ThouM. rii{< 
 
 "]Sn -jTn 
 
 i? 
 
 1^: 
 
 1PP 
 
 1? 
 
 Thee M. 
 
 Thou F. n^ 
 
 17*7 177 
 
 V 
 
 1^: 
 
 i;;p 
 
 1.? 
 
 Thee F. 
 
 He. in^ii 
 
 '^77 
 
 nS 
 
 nrr 
 
 n;D 
 
 nn 
 
 Him M. 
 
 She. «n»K 
 
 
 T 
 
 nn'^ 
 
 T • 
 
 ni. 
 
 T 
 
 HerF. 
 
 WeC. ]^,V 
 
 iVt nn 
 
 
 ^r^U' 
 
 UP 
 
 1? 
 
 UsC. 
 
 Ye M. pni^' 
 
 li37T 
 
 p:)^. 
 
 liBH' 
 
 p^;?^ 
 
 pD2 
 
 You M. 
 
 Ye F. ^riK 
 
 l?p 
 
 P,^ 
 
 pn: 
 
 p^p 
 
 P3 
 
 YouF. 
 
 TheyM. \^^^ 
 
 l^n?! 
 
 lin^ 
 
 linn: 
 
 pniiD 
 
 pn3 
 
 ThemM. 
 
 TheyF. j»J}^ 
 
 P71 
 
 inl^ 
 
 ^nn: 
 
 i^ip 
 
 in? 
 
 Tliera F, 
 
 Rule 17. — Demonstrative, mas. H. Tl fern. 
 ^V:T1 com. PI this, that— singular ; l''^? 1*?^* 
 ^^. n^?!^ ?!?^ these — com. plural. 
 
 Rule 18. — Relative, H 7 who, which, that, 
 for, &:c. com. 
 
 Rule 19. — Interrogative, IP what? whence 
 comes the name of the food which the children 
 of Israel eat in the wilderness — in the Hebrew 
 IP man, and in every other language manna, 
 being originally a Chaldaic word, viz. IP what ? 
 " They asked each other i^^^ IP what is it?" for 
 they did not know what it was : it therefore 
 retained thai name — VP man, or mano. 
 
 A a
 
 OF VERBS. 
 
 Rule 20. — The Chaldee, like the Hebrew, 
 has three kinds ol" verbs, viz. 1 . perfect, 2. qui- 
 escent, 3. defective; which admit of conjuga- 
 tions, moods, tenses, number, person, Sec. 
 
 Rule 21.— The example given for a verb is 
 the same, but differently pointed ; thus, 7^2 for 
 ^i^P ; whence the rest of the conjugations are 
 named, with different characteristics, viz. 
 
 1 7j^5 or*;?!? is simply active ; has {- :) 
 for its characteristics, as . 
 
 le visited. 
 
 VSnX its passive, has n^^ prefixed to 1 -.^p,-,^ C __ ... 
 
 -:•■•, -,,•■•.. i ipSDN i He was visited, 
 
 the root fonts characteristic, as. , i -: • • ^ 
 
 •]|5S 
 
 3. 7'VS active, signifying intensely; has 
 dagesh in the second radical, and 
 the change of yowels, as 
 
 4'7yDr)t< its passive, has Hf^ prefixed, 
 
 and dagesh for its characteristic, > '|!!IT'^ 
 
 as 
 
 He visited dili- 
 gently. 
 
 He was visited 
 diligently. 
 
 TPDK 
 
 He caused ta 
 
 visit. 
 
 5. /VpK active, signifying to cause another 
 
 to do; has K, sometimes H pre- 
 fixed to the root for its characteris- 
 tic, as 
 
 6. Vyp^? its passive, has also ^^ or H for | "'PJ?^ C He was 
 J I > its characteristic, as j^*" 'iir!/ | visit. 
 
 ■ The hith-poa-ngiel conjugation is not used in the Chaldee, on account of 
 the characteristic mark, which they apply to the second and fourth conjugations. 
 
 made to
 
 9 
 
 Rule 22. — The different persons, number, 
 and gender, are made by the inseparable pro- 
 nouns affixed to the root, as marked in the 
 following table, viz. 
 
 The Partici- 
 ple declines 
 like nouns, 
 witii tbe 
 same aflUxes. 
 See the table 
 rule 25. Its 
 characteris- 
 tic is— thus 
 
 1'>pQ one 
 
 who is visit- 
 «d.* 
 
 The Infinitive 
 in 7p hasQ 
 
 prefixed with 
 
 (•) as -T|5DD 
 
 In the other 
 conjugations 
 It lias the same 
 characteristics 
 as marked in 
 the table rule 
 25: it also ad- 
 mits of the let- 
 ters ^27Dn 
 
 prefixed, like 
 the Hebrew. 
 
 The Impera- 
 tive is in the 
 second person 
 only mas. and 
 fern. sing, and 
 plnr. 
 
 Pretcr. 
 
 V 
 
 He M. 
 She F. 
 ThouM. 
 Thon F. 
 I C. 
 
 They M, 
 They F. 
 Ye M. 
 Ye F. 
 WeC. 
 
 ■3 
 
 Note. — Both the preter and the future often signify the tinie present. 
 
 • This fotm is termed by the Chaldeans 7*J^9 whence they form tlie 
 preter of an active conjugation, thus: — 
 
 Preter. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 3 M. 
 
 n>p5D 
 
 3 F. 
 
 ni^ps) 
 
 2 M.t 
 
 iJ-T^pS 
 
 2 F. 
 
 r>Ti?s 
 
 1 0. 
 
 niRSi 
 
 Plur. 
 
 t Whence the yrpri} }^^7^'5^ Daniel* 
 chap. V. vepse 27, " Thoa art weighed," r. 
 VpJl Hebrew 7S|^ he weighed; the {^ 
 is here added for |^ pnragogic.
 
 10 
 
 •JSlSJrl 
 
 'd/viiejddiuj 
 
 •aiiuuj 
 
 ■jeiiiituis ■|''"Md 
 
 •auis -jiiia 
 
 -jejuSuis 
 
 2 fa S fa . 
 
 g BS.-^>.Sfa''^ 
 
 Thou M. 
 Thou F. 
 YeM. 
 YeF. 
 
 HeM. 
 Slie F. 
 Tlion M. 
 Thou F. 
 I C. 
 
 <u 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 72 
 
 
 toO 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 u 
 
 rj 
 
 as 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 (riM 
 
 cd 
 
 o 
 
 « 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 <u 
 
 V 
 
 •— « 
 
 ,£3 
 
 Oh 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 nJ 
 
 r 
 
 •X 
 
 
 1 
 
 <: 
 
 1^ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 Of 
 
 
 di 
 
 
 >J 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 tf 
 
 
 |rr.r;r:r:r 
 
 r»^r r r 
 
 i: 15 52 :c S5. :c 
 
 - c c c c c c 
 
 ! n, O; p' J3» Qi O 
 
 o-r r'r r r.r 
 5 C c;^^ c -^ 
 
 c c c c.. 
 
 r rr r 
 
 
 C C 22 • 
 
 r r r 
 
 r r-r r 
 
 .x-i j^, r^i "^i r-i ^1 r-i J^i j^, r^i 
 ^ 13: O: Xd! 53 13. O. 53 e I 53 53= 
 
 gi^r ririr'rr rt-r r r 
 ? C e.c C '^ ^ c,c,.7> 
 
 (0 #^^ •-'— ^B 
 
 as. as- ss. as- as- as- as. as. as. as 
 
 -;: c c c c c c c c c c 
 
 6f r^i r-i r-i j^i r^i Jr^i .r i r-i /^i r-i 
 ? C: 53= 53: 53. 53= 53 53 53= 53= 0= 
 
 S.r r'rir r=r r-^r r r 
 ^ C c^c q *" as c C:2^ 
 
 53= 53: 53: 53= 
 
 r rr r 
 
 P'-B 
 
 r 
 
 53i r!"53« 
 
 r r r 
 
 * r r rr 
 
 a:= as:-as= as• 
 C C C C 
 
 53:53 53 fl= 
 
 r r r r 
 as 
 
 ?-:.c; cc; as> 
 J^.c c c C 
 
 r 53:53=53^' 
 
 ■^ r r r r 
 
 . asi as' as, as' as, asi asi asi asi as, I asi asi asi >si 
 
 lio 53= Q 53 53 53 53 53 Q 53- Q: 53= 53 53! 53:. 
 
 = r rirtr,r:r r'^r r r r r *" *". 
 ± c c;^*^ c '^ ss c: Cig*^ ^ — ' 
 
 _rs!.c;i ci c;. asi 
 n:J^-j^r-..r^.. 
 r 53:53=53 Q, 
 
 r r r r 
 
 asK as^ as^ as. ^•^ as. ^- ^^acH ^K 
 
 S) 531 53 53 53 .53 53 n- 53' 53i 53i 
 
 2 r r'r'r.rr r'^r r r- 
 € r c^f^ c *- as E E::3- 
 
 C c^C C 
 
 £ii ac 
 
 J^'.E-EKC'-asf 
 
 r='^nK53.Q Q" 
 r |- r^r
 
 u 
 
 
 S' 5* s s: 
 
 js x: « « ^ 
 H H 5h >« ? 
 
 Jk q c C J^ 
 
 •5 
 
 •JAljjy U-rej i •»AI8SBJTiBJ 
 
 •auis uiMj i •Soig -Jiiia 
 
 i s 
 
 s s 3 a 
 
 i3. 
 
 r 
 
 n e C n p 
 
 i3i 
 
 c c c 
 
 
 5— r rT ' 
 
 
 5-r r-^r 
 
 x- 
 
 13:13 13 O U.CIQQ- 
 
 ~r^' D 13 O Q 
 rK| 13: 13 .n 13 
 
 £; C C C g. 
 
 r;j3=n:i3J^ 
 
 25 
 
 r- 
 
 r^Q 13 Q p 
 
 13k 
 2S 
 
 13»13il3«13' 
 
 Q:I3.J3 2: 
 
 as ::-• 
 
 3r.oc 
 
 
 
 13. Q. 13.13. 
 
 rN-r-..r-..r^i- 
 13»13i.l3»-13 
 
 r r^r rv 
 
 C C C C 
 
 pn on- 
 
 55 i:-*^ 
 
 Q'-OhlSi-Q'- 
 13':13»-13fl3'' 
 
 r r'-rr" 
 
 5S i^ — 
 
 « 
 
 CI; 
 
 J- 
 
 !.'•:•» 
 
 r r 
 
 
 

 
 12 
 
 OF QUIESCENT VERBS. 
 
 Rule 24.— Quiescent in first radical *, as ^D! 
 he sat, are declined like ^^l^ viz. in the imper. 
 fut. and infin. of kal ; * is omitted, compensated 
 sometimes by dagesh, as 5^1^. ; sometimes by ^, 
 as ^'^r'>^!', first pers. fut. kal, and I shall know, 
 r. ^y^ : in the light conjugations * is changed to 
 l, as Ezra, chap. iv. verse 10, "i^H ^nlni third 
 mas. sing. pret. aph-ngel, " And made them 
 dwell," 
 
 Rule 25. — Quiescent in second radical \ as 
 ^^p to rise, have no dagesh conjugation ; the rest 
 are declined as follows : 
 
 Aph-ngel. 
 Fern. Mas. 
 
 ]»p»pn q^pn 
 
 ' D^pk 
 
 ^^'^pri pD^pn 
 
 " '.' D»p> 
 
 VP.*15P D»pp 
 
 ]D;f5p J^D^pp 
 
 Ith-pc-ngal. 
 Fem. Mas. 
 
 nppn^f Dpn^? 
 ripj5ri^ Pi:2pjnij: 
 
 l*e-ngal or Kal. 
 
 ^*ppnK vjpnK 
 ]rippnK pnpphN 
 "_ll_Nippnx 
 *pipm ^bpm 
 ^mpr\k ..1a^pn^< 
 ^hpm npn\ 
 VDphk nphri 
 
 : — DpDN 
 
 ]^p:prip Dpnp 
 ibipnp NDiprip 
 
 Fem. 
 
 nBp 
 
 M £i8, 
 
 AP(5 
 
 — — npp 
 ^.?i^ lip^ 
 \r\hp_ |inj:|5 
 
 __ir ^^^pif 
 :^piit), Dip 
 
 Njbp ^p^p 
 mpn Dip' 
 
 yf:i^ph Dipn 
 
 — ^ D^P^i 
 ]f^^pr\ x\nY 
 ]6^pn ]M2^p'n 
 1 — 1 Dipi 
 
 ' T •'r T :'t 
 
 3(1 Sing. ^ 
 Vd — 
 1st — 
 3d Pliir 
 2d — 
 1st — 
 '2d Sing 
 2d Pliir 
 3d Sing. 1 
 2d — 
 1st — 
 3d Plnr 
 2d — 
 1st — 
 Infinitive. 
 3d Sing 
 3d Plur, 
 
 
 
 Note. — Oph-ngal is very seldom used ; as 
 nQ'pn " Were made to stand :" some have 
 
 Daniel, chapter vii. verse 4, 
 short (t ), as Daniel, chapter 
 
 IT. verse 33, DJpnil
 
 13 
 
 Rule 26.— Verbs quiescent in third radical 
 ^J or n are of the same meaning ^'^^ or "^^n a 
 verbal noun, one ; and ^^^H or ^"111 a participle 
 noun, rejoicing : these letters are often changed 
 to ' before the affix, sometimes to "•. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Aph-Dgel. 
 Fern. 3Ias. 
 
 
 
 ItU-pe-Dgal 
 Fcm. Mas. 
 
 K2^7JnK 
 
 
 
 Pe-ngal or Kal. 
 Fern. Mas. 
 
 nK7J n*7i 
 
 
 
 
 3d Sing. ~i 
 2d — 
 1st — 
 3d Plur, 
 2d — 
 1st — 
 
 3d Sing. N o 
 3d Plur. j = 
 
 pan 
 
 pSjin 
 
 p7hnn 
 
 'T : ; • 
 
 p7iri; 
 ]i7Jnr) 
 
 
 
 3(1 Sirg. 
 2d — 
 1st — 
 3d Plur. 
 2d — 
 1st — 
 
 b 
 
 j^^Sjj^ 
 
 ^^JSJn^^ 
 
 kSjxd 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 N»7hD 
 
 
 ham 
 ^?*7ilnb 
 
 ' T ;iT T :l T 
 
 3d Sing. )^ 
 3d Plur. 
 
 r. U« 
 
 Rule 27. — The dagesh conjugations are the 
 same as that of kal ; they are distinguished 
 by dagesh in the second radical, and the change 
 of vowels, like those in the Hebrew.
 
 14 
 
 Rule 28. — The Chaldee end in "i instead of 
 ^ as ^IlJ for ''11! they were ; ^ third radical is 
 changed to "* for vn. 
 
 Rule 29. — Final ] is often added, as P^lf'!'! 
 " And that they might drink," Daniel, chap. v. 
 ver. 2, r. nne^. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON RULE 25. 
 
 1. The characteristic D in ith-pe-ngal is always da- 
 geshed. 2. The future in kal 1 is often changed to short 
 (t), as'^H'^ and ^HO^ Eara, chap. v. ver. 3, r. '^^'il to go. 
 
 3. In ith-pe-ngal (t) is often changed to (.), as |'?ri* 
 " Were fed," Daniel, chap. iv. ver. 12, r. \)t to feed. 
 
 4. Sometimes both the characteristic of the conjugation 
 and that of the mood and tense remain ; as, O^IVllnri 
 '* They have made me to know," Daniel, chap. ii. ver. 5, 
 where D the formative of the future and H the charac- 
 teristic of aph-ngel both remain : also in verse 6, pnnjn 
 ** Shall shew." 5. If the first radical be one of the letters 
 ti^VDT it changes place with the characteristic D of ith- 
 pe-ngal and ith-pa-ngiel ; as, ^?iW^ r. i^^p & pn^DltrT
 
 15 
 
 D^^iSDi npn 
 
 Rule 30. — Defective verbs are those whose 
 first radical is ^ as p?^ "He went out," Daniel, 
 chap. ii. ver. 14. After the letters ^Ti^JKn the 
 J is compensated by dagesh, like ^4^, kc. 
 
 Rule 3 1 . — Verbs doubling the second radical, 
 i. e. those whose second and third radicals are 
 the same, as pp."7 she broke in pieces, are de- 
 fective in one of them — see the table ; and before 
 the affix pronoun compensates by double dagesh 
 in the remaining one, like ^?P, kc. 
 
 Apb-ugel. 
 Pent . Mas. 
 
 ^— ??^ 
 
 n— n— 
 
 - — ^z — 
 K — ^- — 
 
 in \^n 
 
 Ki 
 
 T 
 
 Itb-pt'-Dgal. 
 Feni. Mas. 
 
 np_'^n^^ ^pinN 
 ^Pl™ nprfnj^ 
 
 -— npini^ 
 >^'';TnK ipn'riii? 
 inp.inxpnjnnN 
 
 "-— -" N:)pn™ 
 
 T ' : — : . 
 
 Pe-ngalor Kal. 
 Fcm. Ma^. 
 
 npl PI 
 npl npi 
 -— npi 
 Np^ 'ipn 
 tnpnpnpi 
 
 — ^^P^ 
 
 3d Sing. 
 2d — 
 1st — i 
 3d Pliir i; 
 '2d — 
 ut — 
 
 '> pTK 
 
 i^:- — 1 — ' 
 
 
 *pl p"1 id Sing, i 
 
 NJpl Ipl ^dprn^l 
 
 — n py_ 
 
 p — n — h 
 
 — — ii 
 
 1— n \^ : 
 
 1— n P n 
 
 — : 
 
 — nn — n: 
 p — ^ — nri 
 
 ]-;— nn t'v — n'^. 
 
 IT— nn p — nn 
 
 " — 1' — n5 
 
 ppin pin 
 
 — - P"'^? 
 tjDin tiph; 
 I|5in ppnn 
 
 — piJ 
 
 3d Sii^. 
 2d — 
 1st — aJ 
 3d Plnr. = 
 ;*d - 
 1st — 
 
 Kpnx 
 
 P^nJ? 
 
 Pl^ 
 
 lotinitlve. 
 
 V — pirM2 
 lij ^^. 
 
 V: — Ptinp 
 ix^ — K— ^ 
 
 't t t 
 
 • rp"T pn 
 
 l^?pi^?¥P.i 
 
 3d Slug, i, 
 
 3d Pliir.'S 
 
 '3-. 
 
 Ol>Ji-ngal. — Few w ords are found in this conjugation, as '^VH w* brought 
 up, r. n*?V similar to the Hebrew. 
 
 T T 
 
 B b
 
 16 
 
 Rule 32. — The servile letters are the same as 
 in the Hebrew, except ^ the relative pronoun, 
 which in the Chaldee is "', sometimes '1 that, 
 which, Sec; ^ is also interrogative, as ^l^ij is 
 it certain? Daniel, chap. iii. ver. J 4. 
 
 Rule 33 . — The power of "^ conversive is the 
 same as in the Hebrew, all of which the reader 
 will find in the following verses, annexed to 
 this Grammar for the same purpose as those 
 exercises to the Hebrew. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 ver. 17. 
 
 ; — : .. . T ' : ; T • T ; t t - t — ; t v: 
 
 T : - • T : V : ■• • t : ' : •. t •• • -: t : 
 
 "i/tD^^i ^i^^ji m^ 20. ; h^^k; ^*7^^7 inn 7K'n :niV ^'^j 
 
 — T : •• • T , •• T T — : T v; V ' • t •■ . t ' • — — : • — ; 
 
 T T ; T • T : T — : T : T ' • ' " T : T T V • •• ; •••.•;•.• 
 
 N*oi>n ^^»nr K^ti^nD t^im 21- : t*»n n^ n ^^m^lJ1 
 
 T — : • ; T — T • •• : — : ; • •• • t : ;| 
 
 KVi:Dn r<t:'3nS t^nrjin in* toStJ D^nni ri7?j nnyna 
 
 — — T T T ; — : T ' T — ; ■• T T • •• : T ; 
 
 KTinr:) *n^l^^ fiS^ 17 ss. j t^nty n^v Kiin:n ^?l^ti^^l 
 
 T ; • T T — : T v: ' r " ; " " T T — : — 
 
 ♦:invnin ivn *^ nnn» N^nniui ^^n^2D^ n Ni^? nnt^ai 
 7ip 73 24. J f^^nviin {^37p rpp n ijo eoTO n 
 ♦p»3n7 KiiinS KsSp »:p n ^1n^? '^jr Ss^ S^^n nn 
 ♦:i7J^n nninn S« '?ii ^asnS n7 nx:^ pi Sth? '711 
 : i^^n^ ^?37!3'? K'ntJ^Di {<3'?d dtp
 
 17 
 
 TRANSLATION ACCORDING TO THE OLD VERSION. 
 
 17. Then Daniel went to his house, and made the things 
 known to Hananiah, Mishoiel, and Ngezarioh, his com- 
 panions ; * 
 
 18. That they would desire mercies of the God of hea- 
 ven concerning this secret — that Daniel and his companions 
 should not perish with the rest of the wise men of Babylon. 
 
 19. Then was the secret revealed unto Daniel in a night 
 vision; then Daniel blessed the God of heaven. 
 
 20. Daniel answered and said, blessed be the name of 
 God for ever and ever, for wisdom and might are his. 
 
 21. And he changed the times and the seasons ; he re- 
 moveth kings, and setteth up kings ; he giveth wisdom 
 unto the wise, and knowledge to them that know under- 
 standing. 
 
 22. He revealeth the deep and secret things ; he 
 knoweth what is in the darkness, and the light dwelleth 
 with him. i 
 
 23. I thank thee and praise thee, O thou God of my 
 fathers, who has given me wisdom and might, and has 
 made known unto rae now what we desired of thee, for 
 thou hast made known unto us the king's matter. 
 
 24. Therefore Daniel went in unto Arioch, whom the 
 king had ordained to destroy the wise men of Babylon ; 
 he went and said thus unto him : destroy not the wise men 
 of Babylon ; bring me in before the king, and I will shew 
 unto the king the interpretation.
 
 18 
 
 THE EXPLANATION. 
 
 V. 17. riK Adv. then, Heb. m- "^m v. the root, he 
 went, Heb. 7(t^ • njl^l? sub. Ti^S a house, 
 7 to, n his, a pronoun joined to a noun sing. 
 (rule 15) and to Hananiah, Mishoiel, aud 
 Ngezarioh ; \'li'^Iin a noun plur. in construc- 
 tion with the pron. of the third pers. sing, his 
 (rule 15); KH*!?/? n. Heb. Th'ip the -word, ^ 
 emphatic, the ; Villi v. third mas. sing. pret. 
 aph-ngel, he made known, r. VT he knew. 
 
 T. 18. V^^rD) Subs. plur. mas. r. DIT) undeclinable, mer- 
 cies, Tconj. and; KV^D^ infin. kal, r. )^T1 
 desire, 7 to; ]JD able, from ; Dip before, prep. 
 hSn n. JGod ; K^Dvi^ subs, hoavea (of under- 
 stood); /Vadv. upon, concerning; KTl subs, a 
 secret; Kil apron, demonstrative, this; *1 a 
 pron. relative, which, that; X7 negative pron. 
 not; pi2ln* V. third plnr. mas. fut. aph-ngel, 
 cause to perish (Daniel and his companions); 
 r. 1^^ • DV with, a prep.; llj?^ adv. remain- 
 der ; ^^311 subs. plur. mas. in construction; 
 DDn the wise ; "^^S ; subs, proper. 
 
 V. 19. ^IK Then (as before) to Daniel ; KJtlin substan. 
 vision, 21 in, root Htll he saw; H of; K7V 
 
 ».-» r-:; '• t:- 
 
 subs night ; t^tl secret ; yJ v. was revealed, r. 
 the same as {«{7Jl ; the termination {< or ♦ is 
 the same ; (then Daniel) "^IB blessed, v. part, 
 (the God of heaven) r. "^IH as before. 
 
 V. 20. n:V V. r. he (Daniel) answered ; IDJ^T v. r. IDJ^ 
 
 "T * » — t: — t 
 
 he said, 1 and; \^)T}1 v. infin. to be, r. XIH 
 was np5i^ subslan. the name ; H of (the God) 
 ll-?? participle, pa-ugicl, blessed ; |0 from ;
 
 19 
 
 {^D^y adv. for ever, r. 0*7^ he was hidden: 
 "TVI adv. uniily T and ever ; ♦! relative, who; 
 NDDDn substan. fera. sinff. wisdom Kmi^.l'l 
 substan. strength, land, r. '^5J^ he prevailed j 
 ♦1 gen. of; D^ pron. his, him ; K'H part. fera. 
 sing, she, it, to agree with the preceding 
 noun, being of the same gender, i. e. wisdom 
 and strength are his. 
 
 V. 21. Kini And he ; WK^HD part, aph-ngel, D and H 
 being tlie characteristic, causing to change, r. 
 Kitu^ he changed ; {<^7^ ^^^^' P^""^* times, r. 
 I'ly time; K^^pH subs. plur. seasons, r. |D*« 
 rnVH/IS part, aph-ngel, causing to move (ito 
 transfer); ]*D7D substan. plural, mas. kings; 
 D'i^nDT part. aph. setting up, r. DID ; ]*3^D 
 kings ; IlH* v. third mas. pret. kal, he giveth ; 
 KHDIDn wisdom, a. b.; ]*DDn^ subs, plural, 
 masculine, S dative, to the wise men ; J^V"'jD') 
 subs. Heman, in construction, to them that 
 know ; Hi^S substan. understanding, r. ]^'2 to 
 consider. 
 
 T. 22. Nin Pron. he ; 'SjJ v. r. he revealeth ; ^enp»^y n. 
 fem. sing, the deep, r. ppV ; ^JJl'inppI noun, 
 fera. sing, hidden (things understood), r. "1DD 
 he hid ; VV v. he knew, a. b.; Htt what, pron. 
 interrogative; ^^^1t^^an. fcm. darkness, 2 in, 
 root '^pn ; K*^1ni1 n.fem. ligh^ 1 and ; my 
 compounded of Oy with, and H the pron. affix, 
 hira;Nltt^ a. b. dwelleth. 
 
 T. 23. *^7 Compounded of b to, and *^ pron. thee (God) ; 
 *^)^Il^f subs, father, and *ri pron. my (of is 
 understood) ; K^inD n. part, aph-ngel, ihanks 
 r. Vl ; r\2^l0^ part, noun, praise, r. n^fijf . 
 HiK pron. 1 ; H who, a. b.; NHD^n n. fem.
 
 2© 
 
 wisdom; KJ^^TlDJll and strength, a. b.; n^H* 
 V. second mas. sing. prct. k'al, hast given ; w 
 to me ; \V3^ adv. now, T and ; 'J/^J^lliT verb, 
 third mas. pret. ivph-ngcl, *P me, (thou hast 
 made known unto me) which ; KyyH v. second 
 mas. plural, r. HVS he desired, {^3 the affix 
 pronoun, we — that which we desire ; "^JD 
 compound of D from, and "^i pron. tlice ; *"! 
 that ; Phf2 n. fem. sing, the word or thing ; 
 N3^» of "the king ; {C:nj?"Tin v. a. b. hast 
 made known unto us. 
 
 ', 24. 73 All; Slip on account; H^T this (a Chaldean 
 phrase) Daniel ; IV v. he went, r. 7^V ; SV 
 by Arioch ; H who ; *JD for ; ni!3 v. pret. 
 did please the king ; J^l^inS infin. aph-ngel, 
 to cause to perish, to destroy the Avise men of 
 Babel ; *7]N he went, a. b.; pi and thus, r. 
 y\D ; IPS' said ; TV? to him, a. b. the wise men 
 of Babel ; 7^? abv. not ; Tlllriri you shall not 
 destroy, a. b.; *^7j^n bring me up, v. third 
 mas. sing. *i me, r. 7*25^ he went (in aph-ngel 
 
 he brought) ; Dip before the king, HSSd for 
 "I^Pl? ; N"^t^S1 subs. fem. and the interpreta- 
 tion, r. "i;rQ; KSSpS to the king; KIRN v. 
 first pers. sing, fnt.kal, I will shew, r. niH or 
 Kin to shew. , «> 
 
 ♦ n!D f]^}? ]mr\ ^iis
 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA f 'BR< 
 
 
 e^S 1^ 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 '^/^a3AlN!]3WV 
 
 ^OFCAIIFO%, 
 
 ^^AdvaaiH'^ 
 
 ^OFCAilFOfi"^ 
 
 "^(^AHvaan-^^ 
 
 .^WEUNIVERi-//, 
 
 ce 
 
 < ^l> > 
 
 '<rii3ow-soi^'' 
 
 
 A\lllBRARYQ/r 
 
 .^WEUNIVERS-//, 
 
 vvlOSANGElfj> 
 
 ^<!/0JllV3JO>' <rii]3NVS01^ %a]AiNll 3\\V^ 
 
 
 '^(i/OJIlVDJO'^ \Qi\ 
 
 ,^OFCALIF0% 
 
 ^f?AHvaan-^^ 
 
 aWEUNIVERS/a 
 
 ^vWSAMCElfj}^ 
 
 ^.OFCALIFO/?/(A ^^.OFC/ 
 
 <rii30NVsoi^ '^/^aaAiNn 3V\v ^<?A«vaan-^^^ ^ok^n 
 
 .VlOSANGElfx^ 
 o 
 
 "^/^aaAiNfijWV 
 
 ^lOSANCElfx^ 
 
 %a3AINn3WV 
 
 ^^lllBRARYQc 
 
 ^HIBRARYQ^ 
 
 ^(l/OJIWDJO^ 
 
 aofcaiifo% 
 
 ^OJITVDJO^ 
 ^OFCAiIF0% 
 
 <ril30NVS01^ 
 
 ^^AHvaaii^- 
 
 ^^Aavaaii^^ 
 
 — _ ^ o 
 <f?130NVSm^ 
 
 '^Aa3A 
 
 %a3A 
 
 ^IIIBRARYQ^ 
 
 ^OFCAIIFO/?^ 
 
 6: 
 
 AWEUNIVERy//. 
 
 ^lOSANCElfx^ 
 o 
 
 AWEUNIVER% 
 
 ^lOSANCElfj> 
 
 ^HIBRARYQr 
 
 '^.l/OJnVDJO^ <ril30NVSm^ "^AaJAINfiaUV^ ^OJIWDJO"^ 
 
 ^OFCAllFOff^ 
 
 ^OFC/
 
 s^lUBRARYQ<^ 
 
 -5;^UiBRAR 
 
 fcij 
 
 ^^mimi^'^ 
 
 ^OFCAilFOff^ 
 
 
 ifx^ 
 
 ^.OFCA1IFO% 
 
 ^^A«V8aiH^ 
 
 
 3 1158 00288 0572 
 ^WEUNIVERS/^ 
 
 ^^ 000 136 416 
 
 -< 
 
 ^vVOSANCFlfj^ 
 
 rMi 
 
 FACfLITY 
 
 ^OFI 
 
 Mm\\m//j 
 
 ^mM^Es^ 
 
 
 %a3AIN0]\\v 
 
 ^^HIBRARYQ^ 
 
 ^^IIIBRARYO/^ 
 
 ^.yojnvDjo^ 
 
 ^.!/0JnV3J0>' 
 
 
 AWEUKIVERS/a 
 
 o 
 <Q130NVS01^ 
 
 vvlOSAMCElfj> 
 
 o 
 
 ^OFCALIFO/?^ ^0FCAIIF0% 
 
 %a3AiNa3WV ^^Advaani'^'^ ^(?AavaaiH^ 
 
 
 ^l"LIBRARY(9/;^ ^ILIBRARYQ/v ^\WEUNIVER% v>:lOSANCElfx^ 
 
 !^il(;ti 
 
 '""omm 
 
 ^WEUNIV 
 
 = 13 
 
 
 ^WEUNIV 
 
 Ci*< 
 
 ^ 
 
 §1